Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual

8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 1/290

SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL

7050

THIRD EDITION

APRIL 1997

CODE# CSM-7050



7050SERVICE MANUAL

THIRD EDITION



IMPORTANT NOTICE

Because of the possible hazards to an inexperiencedperson servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of damage to the equipment, Konica Business Technolo-gies strongly recommends that all servicing be per-formed by Konica-trained service technicians only.

Changes may have been made to this equipment toimprove its performance after this service manual wasprinted. Accordingly, Konica Business Technologies,Inc., makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, that the information contained inthis service manual is complete or accurate. It is under-stood that the user of this manual must assume all risksor personal injury and/or damage to the equipment whileservicing the equipment for which this service manualis intended.

© 1999, KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All rights reserved.

Printed in U.S.A.

Corporate Publications Department



iii

CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSREVISION HISTORY ................................................... vii

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................. ix

SAFETY CIRCUITS...................................................... xi

OPERATION

See table of contents in operation section

MAIN BODYOUTLINE AND COMPOSITION .................................2-1

IMAGE READ MECHANISM ......................................2-2

Outline ..................................................................2-2

IMAGE PROCESSING ...............................................2-3

Outline ..................................................................2-3

Analog Processing ................................................2-3

A/D Conversion .....................................................2-3

Shading Correction ...............................................2-3

Brightness/Density Conversion ............................. 2-4

AES Processing ....................................................2-4

Text/Halftone Dot Identification.............................2-4

Filtering .................................................................2-4

Magnification Processing ......................................2-5

Reversal Processing .............................................2-6

Copy γ Correction .................................................2-6

SGU Selector ........................................................2-6

Write Density Control ............................................2-6

Error Dispersion Processing .................................2-6

Image Compression Processing ...........................2-6

Memory .................................................................2-6

Two-Beam Control ............................................... 2-6

IMAGE WRITE ........................................................... 2-7

Outline ................................................................. 2-7

Collimator Lens ................................................... 2-8

Beam Combining Prism ...................................... 2-8

Compression Prism ............................................. 2-8

Fine Adjustment Prism......................................... 2-8

Polygon Mirror ..................................................... 2-8

fθ Lens ................................................................. 2-8

Cylindrical Lenses ............................................... 2-9

Index Sensor ....................................................... 2-9

IMAGE FORMATION ............................................... 2-10

Charging ............................................................ 2-10

Exposure ........................................................... 2-10

Developing ........................................................ 2-10

Transfer ............................................................. 2-10

Separation ......................................................... 2-11

Cleaning ............................................................ 2-11

PCL .................................................................... 2-11

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................... 2-13

System Configuration ........................................ 2-13

Outline of the System ......................................... 2-14

SPACE REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 2-15

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................ 2-16

CENTER CROSS-SECTION ................................... 2-18

DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................... 2-19

Main Drive ......................................................... 2-19

Drum/Developing Drive Unit ............................. 2-20

Paper Feed Drive Unit ....................................... 2-21ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit ........... 2-22

ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit ......... 2-23

1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit .......... 2-24

1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit .......... 2-25

EXTERNALS ........................................................... 2-26

Composition ...................................................... 2-26

Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-26

DRIVE UNIT ............................................................ 2-29

Composition ...................................................... 2-29

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-29


M1 (Main) Control .............................................. 2-31

M4 (Drum) Control ............................................. 2-32

READ SECTION ...................................................... 2-33

Composition ...................................................... 2-33

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-33


M12 (Optics Drive) Control ................................ 2-39

Exposure Control ............................................... 2-43

Original Read Control ....................................... 2-44

APS Control ....................................................... 2-44

AES Control ....................................................... 2-46

WRITE UNIT ............................................................ 2-47

Composition ...................................................... 2-47

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-47


M5 (Polygon) Control ........................................ 2-51

Image Write Control ........................................... 2-52

DRUM UNIT ............................................................ 2-55

Composition ...................................................... 2-55

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-55


PCL/PSL Control ............................................... 2-59

Separation Claw Control ................................... 2-59

Paper Guide Plate Control ................................ 2-60

CORONA UNIT SECTION....................................... 2-61

Composition ...................................................... 2-61

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-61


Transfer/Separation Corona Maintenance ........ 2-65

Charge Control .................................................. 2-66

Transfer/Separation Control .............................. 2-66

M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control ................. 2-67

M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)

Control ............................................................. 2-68

Revised 3/9



iv

DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................ 2-69

Composition ...................................................... 2-69

Mechanism ........................................................ 2-69


M3 (Developing Drive) Control ......................... 2-72

M35 (Agitator Screw) Control ............................ 2-73

Developing Bias Control ................................... 2-73

Toner Density Control ....................................... 2-74

Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control ...................... 2-75

Gray Scale Correction Control .......................... 2-76

FM30 (Developing Suction) Control .................. 2-77

TONER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................ 2-78

Composition ...................................................... 2-78

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-78


Toner Level Detection Control .......................... 2-80

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT ..................... 2-81

Composition ...................................................... 2-81

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-81Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-81

PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................. 2-84

Composition ...................................................... 2-84

Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-84


Paper Feed Control ........................................... 2-93

Paper Up/Down Control .................................... 2-95

Paper Size Detection Control ............................ 2-96

No Paper Detection Control .............................. 2-97

LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE

SECTION..................................................................2-98

Composition ........................................................2-98Mechanisms ........................................................2-98

Disassembly and Reassembly ............................2-99

1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection

Control.............................................................2-101

LCT-1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE

SECTION................................................................2-102

Composition ......................................................2-102

Mechanisms ......................................................2-102

Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-103

1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection

Control.............................................................2-104

LCT PAPER TRAY .................................................2-106

Composition ......................................................2-106

Mechanisms ......................................................2-106


Tray Up/Down Control ......................................2-110

ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION .......2-111

Composition ......................................................2-111

Mechanisms ......................................................2-111


Selector Guide ..................................................2-112

M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control .....................2-113

ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION......2-114

Composition ......................................................2-114

Mechanisms ......................................................2-114

Disassembly and Assembly ..............................2-116

Paper Feed/Reversal Control ...........................2-116

Conveyance Control .........................................2-118

ADU Mis-centering Detection Control ...............2-119

CONVEYANCE SECTION......................................2-120

Composition ......................................................2-120

Mechanisms ......................................................2-120


FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control ................2-122

FUSING UNIT .........................................................2-123

Composition ......................................................2-123

Mechanisms ......................................................2-123


Fusing Temperature Control .............................2-133

OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL...............................2-134Parts Through Which Current Flows When the

Main Switch is Turned OFF.............................2-134

Parts That Operate When the Main Switch is

Turned ON ......................................................2-134

Cooling Fan Control ..........................................2-135

Operation Panel Control ...................................2-137

Counter Control .................................................2-139

Option Control ...................................................2-140

DIAGRAMSELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ...............3-1

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...........................3-4OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................3-7

CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................3-23

OPERATION BOARD/1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...........3-35



DC DRIVER BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...............3-38

TONER CONTROL SENSOR BOARD CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ...............................................................3-45

TRANSFER PAPER DETECTING BOARD

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................3-46

TRANSFER PAPER LED BOARD CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM ...............................................................3-47

DRUM BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ........................3-47

TIMING CHARTTIMING CHART ..........................................................4-1

ADU TIMING CHART .................................................4-2

JAM LISTPaper Jam ................................................................. 5-1

FS-103/FS Cross-Reference Table........................... 5-7

Revised 3/99



v

CONTENTS

Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation Timing...... 7-17

Functions When Auto Button is Pressed or

Original is Placed in ADF ............................ 7-18

Switching Auto/Manual Priority ......................... 7-18

ATS Selection .................................................... 7-18

11x17 Double Count Setting ............................. 7-18

Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4 ............ 7-19

FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer)........................ 7-19FS-103 Original Count Over Control ................. 7-19

Message Language Selection .......................... 7-20

Priority of the Paper Size.................................... 7-20

Jumping Selection of the Paper Size ................ 7-20

FS-102/103 Overload Control Select................. 7-20

Setting Intermittent Time for Running Test ....... 7-21

ADF Frame Erase Selection .............................. 7-21

PM Cycle Setting ................................................ 7-21

Finisher Initial Mode Setting .............................. 7-21

Clearing Fusing Failures .................................. 7-21

Auto Reset Setting ............................................. 7-21

Key Counter Operation Selection ...................... 7-22

Switching the Contents of Normal/High ............ 7-22

ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure Setting ............. 7-22

Toner Level Detecting Selection ....................... 7-22

Master Key Code Setting ................................... 7-22

Original Image Shift Setting............................... 7-23

Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/Transversal

Line Paper ........................................................7-23

25 Mode Address Map ........................................7-24

36 MODE ..................................................................7-29

Setting Method ....................................................7-29

Running Test Mode .............................................7-29

Adjusting Lead Edge Timing ...............................7-30

Paper Feeding Loop Adjustment ........................7-30

Lead-to-Trail Magnification Adjustment ..............7-31

Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ............................7-31

Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing

Adjustment ........................................................7-32

Original Lead Edge Erasure Adjustment.............7-32

Optical Brake Adjustment ...................................7-33

Centering Adjustment .........................................7-33

Writing Unit Adjustment for One-Sided.............. 7-34

ADU Adjustment for Rear Side.......................... 7-34

Adjustment on Original Image for One-Sided ... 7-35

Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,

Address 80........................................................7-35

List of 36 Mode ...................................................7-3635 MODE ..................................................................7-37

Setting Method .................................................. 7-37

Lead Edge Timing Adjustment .......................... 7-37

List of Mode 35 .................................................. 7-38

Test Patterns of 35 Mode ................................... 7-39

Overall Halftone (35-01) ............................. 7-39

Gray Scale Pattern (35-02) ......................... 7-40



Beam Misalignment Check (35-11) ............ 7-43

Warning ..................................................................... 5-8

Trouble .............................................................. 5-10

LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONS .......... 5-16

Paper Jamming ................................................. 5-16

Warning ............................................................. 5-16

Warning ............................................................. 5-17

Others ................................................................ 5-18

ADJUSTMENTHOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT MANUAL............6-1

ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS...........6-1

SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P

FUNCTION ...............................................................6-3

List of Confirmation Item by Means of the

P Function ...........................................................6-3

Confirmation of the PM Count and Resetting ......6-3

Setting the Density Shift ........................................6-4

Confirmation of the Drum Count and Resetting . 6-4

Service Data Control Operation Mode Access .... 6-4

Function to Control Data ...................................... 6-5

DIAGNOSTICS47 MODE AND MULTI MODE ....................................7-1

Method of Setting the 47 Mode............................ 7-1

Initializing the NVRAM......................................... 7-2

Charge Corona Current Adjustment ................... 7-3

Transfer Current Adjustment ............................... 7-3

Separation (AC) Current Adjustment ................... 7-3

Separation (DC) Current Adjustment .................. 7-3

Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment......................... 7-4

Developing Bias Adjustment ............................... 7-4

Test Pattern Density Adjustment ......................... 7-5

Initial Setting ........................................................ 7-5

Adjustment Mode List .......................................... 7-5

L Detection Adjustment ....................................... 7-6

Telephone Number Setting ................................. 7-6

Input Check List ................................................... 7-7

Output Check List ................................................ 7-9

Adjustment Mode List ........................................ 7-12

47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103................ 7-14

25 MODE ................................................................. 7-15

Selection Method ............................................... 7-15

ECM ................................................................... 7-15

Copy Control/Service Control Mode Enable ..... 7-15

Data Control Function Select ............................ 7-15Pre-heat Mode Temperature Selection ............. 7-16

Pre-heat Mode Shut Off Time ............................ 7-16

Selection of Fusing Control During Auto Shut

Off .....................................................................7-16

Setting of Auto Shut Off and Auto Pre-heat

Timing ..............................................................7-16

Selecting Outside Erasing the Original ...............7-17

Auto Outside Erasing the Original.......................7-17

Selecting Preliminary Rotation of Polygon

Motor .................................................................7-17

Revised 3/99



vi

Linearity Evaluation Pattern (35-16)........... 7-44

Process Overall Halftone (35-60) ............... 7-45

Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-30).... 7-46

Copy γ Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-32) . 7-47

Write Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-36) .... 7-48

Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern

(35-37) ........................................................ 7-49Writing Unit for Centering (35-80, P+1) ........7-50

ADU for Centering (35-80, P+2) ...................7-51

Front Edge Timing (Printer) (35-80, P+3)..... 7-52

Printer Type Horizontal Magnification (Main

Drive Speed Adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) .......7-53

Main Scanning Sub-scanning Alignment

(35-80, P+5) ...............................................7-54

Adjustment of Gradation (LD1)

(35-80, P+6) ...............................................7-55

Adjustment of Gradation (LD2)

(35-80, P+7) ...............................................7-56

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS .......................................... 7-57

Adjustment for One-Sided ................................. 7-57Tray Tilt Adjustment ........................................... 7-59

SERVICESERVICE SCHEDULE ...............................................8-1

Service Schedule ..................................................8-1

Maintenance Items ................................................8-2

Periodic Check (Main Body) .................................8-7

Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) .....................8-9

Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) ........................8-9

Regular Service FNS (FS-103) ...........................8-10

SERVICE MATERIALS .............................................8-10

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .............................................8-11

INSTALLATIONINSTALLATION ..........................................................9-1

Site Requirements ................................................9-1

Unpacking .............................................................9-1

Accessories ..........................................................9-2

Installation Procedure ...........................................9-3

L-Detection Adjustment .........................................9-8

Paper Size Setting ................................................9-9

Confirmation of Operation ...................................9-12

INDEX

Revised 3/99



vii



viii



ix



x



xi

SAFETY CIRCUITSThe electrical circuit of this machine contains the following

safety circuits to prevent an accident from occurring in the

event of an abnormality.

• Overall safety circuit protector

• Exposure lamp (L1) overheating protection circuit

• Fusing heater lamps (L2, L4) overheating protection

circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide the

service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order

to prevent servicing errors that may impair their function.

Overall Safety Circuit Protector

Protection function provided by softwareWhen the L1 CONT signal output from the protection

function control board (CB) by software becomes [L], L1

lights. At the same time, the L1 FB signal, which indicates

that L1 is lit, is output from DCPS2 to the CB.

The CB monitors both the L1 CONT and L1 FB signals.

If they differ from each other, main relay (RL1) will be

turned OFF, and power to L1 will be cut off.

CAUTION: The function of RL1 must not be de-

activated under any circumstances.

Protection function using hardware timer circuit(HT)

If L1 remains lit for more than prescribed time because of

some abnormality, the hardware timer on DCPS2 will

operate, forcibly cutting off the relay on this board.

CAUTION: The function of relay must not be de-


Protection function using optics temperature fuse(f1)

If the temperature in the vicinity of f1 rises above

prescribed temperature f1 will blow, cutting off the flow

of current to L1.CAUTION: Do not under any circumstances use a

piece of wire, etc., In place of f1.

Exposure Lamp (L1) OverheatingProtection Circuit

Protection function provided by the circuit breaker

(CBR)This function breaks the AC line instantaneously in the

event that an excessive current flows due to a short

between the AC line, for example.

CAUTION: The function of the CBR must not be de-

activated under any circumstances

whatever.



xii

Fusing Heater Lamp (L2, L4) OverheatingProtection Circuit

Protection function provided by softwareThis function turns OFF fusing heater lamp 1 (L2), fusing

heater lamp 2 (L4) and main relay (RL1) in the event that

the output voltage from fusing temperature sensor 1 (TH1)

read the CPU is abnormal.

CAUTION: Periodically check the contact face of

TH1 with respect to the roller, and replace

TH1 if it is abnormal.

The function of RL1 must not be de-


Protection function provided by hardware circuitThis function uses a comparator circuit which compares

the output voltage of fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2

(TH1 and TH2) with the abnormal judgment reference

value. It disconnects L2, L4 and RL1 from the circuit in

the event that the output voltage of TH1 or TH2 exceeds

the reference value.

CAUTION: Periodically check the contact face of TH1,

TH2 with respect to the roller, and replace

TH1, TH2 if it is abnormal.

The function of RL1 must not be de-


Protection function provided by the upper thermostat(TS1) and lower thermostat (TS2)

This function turns OFF TS1 or TS2, directly cutting off the

power to L2, L3 and L4, if the temperature of the either

upper fusing roller or lower fusing roller exceeds the

specified value.

CAUTION: Do not substitute a different electrical

conductor in place of TS1 or TS2.



xiii

The caution labels are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any

dangerous situations or serious injury.

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

CAUTION:

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution labelto keep yourself away from.

Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, clean the label.If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed, please contact your Service

Centre.

CAUTIONVORSICHTATTENTION

HIGHHEISSETEMPERATURE

TEMPERATUREINNENFLACHEN ELEVEE

HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION.VORSICHT HOCHSPANNUNG.

ATTENTION HAUTE TENTION.

This portion is internally very hot.

Do not touch it, lest you should get burnt.

CAUTION:

ATTENTIONHaute temperaturerisque de brülure.

Soyez prudent en retirant

une feuille coincée.

VORSICHTHohe temperaturenKönnen verbrennungen verursachen.

Bitte vorsicht bei antfernen

von papierstau.

CAUTIONHigh temperaturecan cause burns.

Take care when

removing jam.

High Temperature !Température élevée !Heiße Oberfläche !

DO NOT TOUCHUse care when clearing paper.

Risque de brülure.Soyez prudent en retirant la feuille coincée.

Brandverletzungsgefahr.Bei Beseitigung von Papierstaus vorsichtigvorgehen.

CAUTION/ATTENTION/VORSICHT

This portion is

internally very hot.

Do not touch it, lest

you should get burnt.

CAUTION:

This portion has a high

voltage generated.

Never touch it, lest you

should be electrically

shocked.

CAUTION:

This portion is

internally very hot.Do not touch it, lest

you should get burnt.

CAUTION:

The ADU guide plate is not

latched. Do not release it,

lest you may cause injury.

CAUTION:



OPERATION

1-1

OPERATIONSUser's Reference Guide Availability

7050 User's Reference Guides may be ordered from the EastCoast Parts Distribution Center using standard ordering pro-

cedures.

7050 User's Reference Guide OP-01-7050



1-2

This page left blank intentionally.



MAIN BODY

2-1

OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION

In a digital copier, the light reflected from the original is converted into electrical signals, subjected to image processing, then

converted back into light and directed onto the drum.

Figure 1 shows the composition of the machine, and Figure 2 an outline of the digital copying process.

Figure 1

Electrical signalImage read Image processingOriginal

Optical data Electrical signal

Image write

Optical data

PCL ChargingDeveloping

Cleaning

Fusing

Separation <- Transfer corona

Figure 2

Polygon mirror

Developing unitPCL

Image processing unit

Fusing unit

Cleaningunit

Separationcorona unit

Transfercorona unit

OPC drum

PSL

Charging corona unit

Image read unit

Image write unit



2-2

IMAGE READ MECHANISM

OutlineA halogen lamp is used as the light source. The light from the

lamp is directed onto the original.

The light reflected off the original is reflected by the 1st, 2nd and

3rd mirrors shown in Figure 3. Then, it is passed through the

lens and directed onto the CCD image sensor.

The CCD image sensor consists of 5000 pixels. One pixel is

7 µm in length, and the length on the original that can be read

by one pixel is 63.5 µm.

Light source (halogen lamp) 2nd mirror

3rd mirrorLens1st mirror

CCD image sensor

Figure 3



MAIN BODY

2-3

IMAGE PROCESSING

OutlineThe analog signal produced by the CCD sensor on the A/D

board is subjected to analog processing, then A/D-converted,

and subjected to image processing.

Image processing consists of shading correction, brightness/

density conversion, AES processing, text/dot pattern

judgement, filter/magnification change processing, copy γ

correction, write density correction, and 2-beam control. Inaddition, error dispersion processing and data compression

are carried out within the electronic RDH.

Analog ProcessingIn the analog processing unit, the minute signals from the CCD

sensor are amplified and level-shifted into the A/D conversion

range.

Amplification and level-shifting are done automatically during

shading correction timing by an electronic variable resistor.

There is no need for any manual adjustment.

A/D ConversionThe image signals from the analog processing unit are con-

verted one pixel at a time into 9-bit digital signals.

Shading CorrectionShading correction evens out the light distribution of the CCD

sensor. The following correction takes place at the specified

timing.

White CorrectionThe voltage output from each pixel of the CCD sensor

when the white reference plate is exposed to the light from

the exposure lamp is memorized as the maximum output

value for that pixel.

Black Correction

The output voltage from each pixel of the CCD sensorwhen the exposure lamp is out is memorized as the

minimum output voltage for that pixel.

• Based on the difference between the white and black

data for each pixel memorized in 1 and 2 above, the

calculated result that indicates the number of the step

corresponding to the image data read from the original

is output to an accuracy of 10 bits.

CCD imagesensor

A/Dconversion

A/D board

Shading correction Copy γ correction

Selector SGUWrite density

control2-beam control

Data compressionand expansion

Image writeError dispersion

processing

Electronic RDH

Memory

Figure 4

Figure 5

Image processing board

Brightness/densityconversion,AES processing,Text/dot pattern

judgement, filter/ magnification

processingreversalprocessing



2-4

Figure 7

Brightness/Density ConversionThe signal resulting from shading correction corresponds to

the light reflected off the original, hence it is referred to as a

brightness signal. The brightness/density conversion section

converts the brightness signal into a density signal, as shown

below.

AES ProcessingA density that is suitable for the density of the original is

automatically selected by AES processing, and a suitable

copy made.

AES Sampling RangePlaten mode: 176 mm x original length

Brightness

e n s

y

176 mm

Figure 6

ADF mode (1-1): 176 mm x 28 mm

176 mm

ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2): 176 mm x 210 mm

28mm

176 mm

210mm

Figure 8

Figure 9

Text/Dot Pattern IdentificationIn order to copy an original under the optimum conditions , the

text/dot pattern identification section judges whether the read

is text, dot pattern, or a photograph, and uses the results in the

subsequent filtering section.

FilteringThe appropriate filtering takes place according to the kind of

original and the selected magnification.

• Text filter: highlights the light and dark parts of the

original.

• Dot pattern filter: reduces moire.

• Photograph filter: improves the gray scale reproduc-

tion.



MAIN BODY

2-5

Magnification ProcessingIn an analog machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed

by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and

front-to-rear magnification by changing the position of the

lens. In this machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed

by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and the

front-to-rear magnification by means of electrical image

processing.The read unit of the CCD (63.5 µm) and the write unit of the

laser (63.5 µm) are equal to each other, and remain unchanged

when the copy image is enlarged or reduced in the vertical

direction. As a result, write data that corresponds exactly to the

write position when the image is enlarged or reduced in the

vertical direction sometimes fails to exist.

Front-to-Rear Magnification Change ProcessingDuring Enlargement

As shown in the example of Figure 10, if the pixel data

obtained when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5,

the positions of the read data when the image is enlarged

are E1 to E5.. However, the following problems will occur

if the write data consists of this read data alone.

• There will be a gap between one data and the next,

resulting in gaps in the image.

• The data position and write position will not coincide

exactly.

Consequently, if the read data that corresponds exactly to

the write position fails to exist, as indicated by the dotted

lines of Figure 10, the write density is determined as shown

below.

Fig.10

Original read position

Write position

Data position whenimage is enlarged

Front-to-Rear Magnification Change ProcessingDuring ReductionAs shown in the example of Figure 11, if the pixel data obtained

when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5, the positions

of the read data when the image is reduced overlap each other

as indicated by R1to R5, hence the write positions fail to

coincide with the read positions. Therefore, the write density

is determined as shown below.

Position

Figure 12

D e n s i t y

E2 – E1

16

Density CorrectionFigure 11 is a graph the vertical axis of which represents

density (256 steps) and the horizontal axis of which represents

position: Here, the distance between E2 and E1 of Figure 10

is set out on the horizontal axis and divided into 16 steps. If the

position with respect to write data W2 is “ ”, the density S can

be obtained using the following equation.

S = E1 + ( ) x

Figure 11

Original read position

Data position when theimage is reduced

Write position



2-6

Reversal ProcessingThis function reverses the input brightness data in order to

reverse black and white when the reverse copy mode is

selected.

Copy γ γ CorrectionThe copy γ correction function selects the density curve

corresponding to the density selected by the density button on

the operation panel. The selected density curve is applied to

the data that was subjected to filter/magnification change

processing.

Suitable density curves are provided for the text, photo, and

text and photo modes.

Selector, SGUSelector is a function that switches between the image signal

from the electronic RDH, and the read time image processed

signal.

SGU is a function that generates various test patterns .

Write Density ControlThe write density control function converts image data to the

optimum laser exposure based on the characteristics related

to the drum like drum potential, toner density, etc.

Image Compression Processing This processing function stores compressed image data in

the memory to enable a large quantity of image data to be

stored when electronic RDH is used.

Memory The memory can hold about seventy 8.5x11 size originals

consisting of average word processor text. The number of

pages will be less than this if the originals include many

photographs and halftone dot images. Expansion memory

units MU-101 and MU-102 are available as options.

Two-beam controlThis function is used to adjust the timing of the laser data from

the two beams and also to detect and correct any deviation

between the two beams.

Laser exposure level

C o p y d e n s

i t y

Figure 13

Error Diffussion ProcessingError diffusion processing is intended to make efficient use of

the installed image memory and also to obtain a satisfactory

copy image.



MAIN BODY

2-7

IMAGE WRITE

OutlineFigure 14 shows the layout of the various parts of the write unit.

The processed image data is emitted by semiconductor lasers.

The light from these lasers is sent via the path shown in Figure

15 to the OPC drum.

fθ lens unit

V mirror unit

CY1 lens

Beam combining prism

Fine adjustment prism 2

Collimator lens unit 2

Semiconductor laser LD2

Fine adjustmentprism 1

Polygon mirror

CY2 lens

Figure 14

Semiconductor laser 1(LD1)

Semiconductor laser 2(LD2)

Beam combiningprism

Figure 15

Index mirror Index sensor

OPC drum3rd mirror

Cylindrical lens 2(Cy2)

Cylindrical lens 1 (cy1) Polygon mirror

Fine adjustment prism2 (main scanning)

Fine adjustment prism1 (sub scanning)

Compression prism 1 Compression prism 2

Collimator lens unit 1 Collimator lens unit 2

3rd mirror

Stepping motor

Semiconductor laser LD1

Glass cover

Index mirror

fθ lensunit

Index sensor

V mirrorunit

Compression prism 2

Collimator lens unit 1

Compression prism 1

3rd mirror 2nd mirror

1st mirror



2-8

Collimator LensFigure 16 shows the function of the collimator lens. This lens

is used to form the light that diverges from a point source into

a parallel beam.

Beam Combining PrismThis prism causes the beams from the two semiconductor

lasers that are mounted at right angles to each other to be

emitted in the same direction.

Compression PrismThis prism shapes the beam emitted from each semiconductor

laser and adjusts the height in the up/down direction.

Fine Adjustment PrismThis prism performs fine adjustment of the beam emitted from

each semiconductor laser in the left/right and up/down

directions.

Collimatorlens

Semiconductorlaser

Parallelbeam

Figure 16

Semiconductor laser 1



Fig.17

Polygon MirrorThis is a multi-sided mirror which converts the laser beam into

a scanning beam. The polygon mirror in this machine has

eight sides. Figure 18 shows the appearance of the polygon

mirror.

fθθ LensThe polygon mirror rotates at a constant angular speed.

Consequently, if a general image forming lens were to be used,

the speed at which the laser beam scans the surface of the

drum would vary between the center and the edge of the drum,as shown in Figure 19.

An fθ lens is used to maintain the scanning speed constant

over the entire length of the drum.

Figure 20

Polygonmirror

Cylindricallens

Drum;Scanningspeed isconstant.

Polygonmirror

Figure 19

Drum;Scanningspeed falls asbeamapproachescenter ofdrum.Image forming lens

Laser beam

Laser beam

fθ lens

Figure 18



MAIN BODY

2-9

Cylindrical LensesTwo lenses, cylindrical lens 1 (Cy1) and cylindrical lens 2

(Cy1), are used to eliminate the tilt error of the polygon mirror.

Cylindrical lenses 1 and 2 are positioned before and after the

polygon mirror, as shown in Figure 21. The laser beam is

focused on the polygon mirror by cylindrical lens 1, and the

light reflected off the polygon mirror is once again focused on

the drum by cylindrical lens 2.The optical relationship between the polygon mirror and the

drum face with respect to cylindrical lens 2 is that of image and

object. Consequently, even if the polygon mirror is tilted, the

light path is corrected by cylindrical lens 2, ensuring that the

beam is scanned along the same line.

Index Sensor

This sensor is intended to determine the leading edge writeposition for each scan in the axial direction of the drum, and

also to determine the positions of the two beams.

Figure 21

Cylindrical lens1 (Cy1)

Collimator lens Cylindrical lens2 (Cy2)

Polygonmirror

fθ lens unitMirror

Drum

Semiconductorlaser



2-10

IMAGE FORMATION

Charging

A negative charging method using a scorotron is employed. A

constant negative voltage is applied to the charging plate and

back plate in order to maintain the potential of the drum

constant.

Exposure

Exposure is done with the laser beams, causing the charge on

the drum to be erased. Two laser beams are used to write

(exposure) two lines of image data at a time.

Developing

Negatively charged toner adheres to the surface of the drum

where the charge was erased during the exposure process.

Transfer

The transfer corona unit causes the toner on the drum to be

transferred to the paper by means of a discharge from the back

of the paper.

The PSL improves the transfer of the toner and the separation

of the paper.

Figure 22


Figure 24

Figure 23

Drum

Transfercorona unit

Figure 25

PSL



MAIN BODY

2-11

Separation

The toner remaining on the drum is removed by the cleaning

blade.

The separation corona unit erases the charge on the paper by

applying an AC discharge from the back of the paper, thus

allowing the paper to separate from the drum under its own

weight.

Cleaning

Separation corona unit

Figure 26

Cleaning blade

Toner collecting roller

Drum

Figure 27

PCL

Figure 28

Drum

The PCL uses light to erase the potential remaining on the

surface of the drum.



2-12




2-13

MAIN BODY

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONSystem Configuration



2-14

System Configuration



2-15

MAIN BODY

SPACE REQUIREMENTS



2-16

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONSType

Type: Console type

(floor-mounted type)

Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method

Original table method: Fixed

Photosensitive

material: OPC

Sensitizing method: Laser writing method

Paper feed method: Two stacked trays (total capacity

of 500 sheets of 20 lb. paper)

Two LCT trays (1000 & 1500

sheet capacity of 20 lb. paper)

Bypass tray (150 sheet capacity

of 20 lb. paper)

FunctionsOriginals: Sheets, books, solid objects

Original size: Max 11x17

Copy size: 11x17 to 5.5x8.5RMagnification

Fixed magnifications: x0.50, x0.65, x0.77, x1.00, x1.29,

x1.55, x2.00

User set

magnifications: Two

Zoom magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)

Vertical magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)

Horizontal

magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)

Warm-up time: Approximately 6.5 minutes

(68°F, rated voltage)

First copy time (seconds)

frame erasure, shift, reduction

shift, weekly timer, job memory,

same size standard mixed

original mode

Copy PaperPlain paper • 20 lb. to 24 lb. fine quality paper

Special paper • Label paper (specified by Konica)

• OHP film (specified by Konica, by-

pass feed only)

• Blueprint master (specified by Konica)

• 16 lb. to 32 lb. general purpose paper

OptionKey counter

Finisher: FS-102/FS-103

Weekly timer: WT-101K

Expansion memory unit: MU-101/MU-102

Image processor: IP-201

Machine ParticularsPower source: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 20 A

Power consumption: Max. 1500 W

Weight: Approximately 440 lb.

Machine dimensions

Continuous copy speed (life size, copies/minute)

Size

Manual

AES

APS

8.5x11

4.9

4.9

4.9

Size

8.5x11

8.5x11

50

Number of

continuous copies: 1 to 999

Original density

selection: AES, manual

arbitrarily set density

(two settings)

Special functions: OHP intersheet, thin paper/thick

paper mode, 2 IN 1; 4 IN 1

mode, intersheet, insertion

page, chapter demarcation,

book copy, repeat, text/photo

mode, reversed black and

white mode, erasure outside

original area, fold erasure,



2-17

MAIN BODY

ServiceService interval: Every 120,000 copies

MaterialsDeveloper: Konica 7050 only

Toner: Konica 7050 only

Drum: Konica 7050 only

Machine Working EnvironmentTemperature:50°F to 86°F

Humidity: 10% to 80%

The contents of this manual are subject to change without

notice.



2-18

ADF

Image read unit

Image write unit

Developing unit

Paper feed unit

Upper tray

2nd paper feed unit

Transfer corona unit

PSL

Separation corona unitLCT-1000 tray

LCT-1500 tray

ADU paper feed/ conveyance unit

Lower tray

Conveyance unit

ADU paper exit/ conveyance unit

Fusing unit

Image processing unit

Exposure lamp

Cleaning unit

PCL

Chargecorona unit

CENTER CROSS-SECTION



MAIN BODY

2-19

DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Main Drive



2-20

Drum/Developing Drive Unit



MAIN BODY

2-21

Paper Feed Drive Unit



2-22

ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit



MAIN BODY

2-23

ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit



2-24

1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit



MAIN BODY

2-25

1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit



2-26

EXTERNALS

Composition

Disassembly and ReassemblyCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been

unplugged from the power outlet.

Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, secure the new

filter securely to the inside of the main body.

Replacing Ozone Filter (S)

Procedure(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear

cover.

Paper feedandconveyancedoor

Right sideupper cover

Right side lower cover

ADF

ADFconnector

Rear cover

Bypass feedtable

Main switch

Paper exit tray

Left sideuppercover

ADUconveyance

door

Left side

lower cover

LCT-1500tray

LCT-1000tray

ADU

Lower tray

Upper tray

Front door

Operation panel

LCTconveyance door

Outer I/F connector

FNS connector

(2) Pull out the ozone filter box toward you, then attach the

handle to the board mounting panel and secure it.

(3) Pull up ozone filter (S), then pull it out and remove it.

Ozone filter box

Ozone filter (S)

Handle Board mounting panel

(5) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.

ADF

Set screw

Set screws

Set screw

ADFconnector(CN102)

Set screw

Set screw

Set screw

Set screws



2-27

MAIN BODY

Replacing Ozone Filter (H)Procedure

(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear

cover.

(2) Pull forward ozone filter (H) and remove it.

(3) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Replacing the Developing Suction FilterProcedure

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the lock, open the filter box, and remove the

developing suction filter.

(3) Reinstall the suction filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Replacing the Dust Prevention FilterProcedure

(1) Open the front door and the ADU conveyance door.

(2) Loosen the four set screws, then remove the left side

upper cover.

(3) Open the ADF.

(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass

holder.

(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the original

stopper plate.(6) Remove the platen glass.

Ozonefilter (H)

Developingsuction filter

Filter box

Set screws

Originalstopper plate Platen

glass

Glassholder

Set screws

Setscrews

ADUconveyance

Set screws

Front door

Left sideupper cover



2-28

(7) Remove the two set screws, and remove the upper

cover (center).

(8) Remove the old dustproof filter, then install the new

dustproof filter (filter has adhesive strip).

(9) Install the other parts in the reverse sequence to

removal.

Set screw

Upper cover (center)

Set screw

Dust preventionfilter



MAIN BODY

2-29

DRIVE UNIT

Composition

Mechanism Method

Drum drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)

Developing sleeve drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)Developing agitator drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)

2nd paper feed drive Timing belt + gear drive

conveyance drive Timing belt + gear drive

Fusing and exit drive Timing belt + gear drive

ADU lead-in drive Timing belt + gear drive

Toner recycle Timing belt + gear drive

*1

*1*1

Procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (Refer to

the drum carriage section.)

(2) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear

cover.(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the two

flywheels.

*1: Separation of the different parts of the drive system

The drum, developing sleeve, and developing agitator of

this machine are driven by separate motors in order to

improve the serviceability of the drum unit and also to

improve the developing performance.

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Main Motor UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Caution: Be sure to remove the drum carriage before removing

or reinstalling the main motor unit.

If you leave the drum carriage in place, the cleaning

blade is likely to be damaged because the drum will

turn when you remove or reinstall the flywheel.

Mechanisms

Set screws

Flywheel

Agitator screw motor (M35)

Drum motor (M4)

Developing drive motor (M3)

Main motor (M1)

Drum drive unit



2-30

(4) Disconnect the three connectors (CN204, 205 and

324), then remove the cable from the wiring clamp.

(5) Remove the four set screws, slide the main motor unit

to the right, then pull it forward and remove it.

Caution: DO NOT strike the main motor unit against the drum

drive gear when removing or reinstalling it.

(6) Reinstall the main motor unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Replacing the Paper Feed Drive Shaft and FusingInput Gear

Procedure

(1) Remove the main motor unit.

(2) Remove the e-ring.

(3) Remove the bearing, then remove the developing

drive gear unit.

(4) Remove the spring, then loosen the two set screws

and remove the tension from main body drive belt.

(5) Remove the three set screws, then remove the fusing

drive plate.

Caution: Be careful not to lose the polyslider when installing

the fusing drive plate.

(6) Remove the fusing input gear.

(7) Remove the four set screws, then remove the paperfeed drive plate.

E-ring

Main motor unit

Developing drivegear unit

Bearing

Set screws Fusing drive plate

Fusing inputgear

Spring

Set screws(Loosen)

Main body drive belt

Guide screw

Slotted hole

Set screwConnectors(CN204 and 205)

Drumdrive gear

Set screwConnector (CN324)

Set screw

Set screw

Main motorunit



MAIN BODY

2-31

(8) Remove the bearing, polyslider and paper feed input

gear.

(9) Remove developing drive gear, then pull out the pin

remaining on the shaft.

(10)Remove the paper feed drive shaft.

(11)Reinstall the paper feed drive shaft and fusing input

gear in the opposite sequence to removal.

M1 (Main) Control

M1 (main) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC

driver board (DCDB).

OperationM1 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the ADU paper

exit/conveyance, toner recycle, conveyance, 2nd paper

feed and fusing sections. M1 is PLL-controlled by feedback

signals from a speed sensor installed inside M1 itself,

maintaining it at a constant speed.

M1 goes ON when the start print button is pressed, and

goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.

If the upper fusing roller fails to reach the set temperature

within the specified time from the start of warmup, M1

remains ON until the completion of warmup.

SignalsInput signal

• M1 ACK (M1 −> DCDB −> CB)

[L] is output when M1 reaches the specified speed.

Output signals

• M1 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M1)

This is the M1 drive control signal.

[L]: M1 ON

[H]: M1 OFF

• M1 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M1)This is the M1 rotational speed control reference clock

signal.

Set screws

Paper feeddrive plate Polyslider

Fusing input gear

Paper feedinput gear

Poly-slider

Bearing Developing drivegear

Paper feeddrive shaft



2-32

M4 (Drum) Control

M4 (drum) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC

driver board (DCDB).

Operation

M4 is a 24 V drive DC motor that drives the drum and the

cleaning guide roller. M4 is PLL-controlled by a reference

signal and feedback signal from a speed sensor installed

inside M4 itself, maintaining it at a constant speed.


goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.

SignalsInput signal

• M4LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)


Output signals

• M4CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M4)


[L]: M4 ON

[H]: M4 OFF

• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)

This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.

Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec

[L] is used during warmup for D-max and gamma

correction, and in printer mode for 600 dpi.



2-33

MAIN BODY

READ SECTION

Composition

Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Light source Halogen lamp (170 W)

Exposure Light source shift slit exposure

Scanning 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror shift

Lamp power supply Lamp cord

Cooling of optics Cooling of intake air using a fan

Disassembly and ReassemblyScrews that must not be removed

The 16 set screws of the CCD unit

V mirror (2nd and 3rd mirrors)

CCD unit

A/D converter board(ADB)

A/D converterboard (ADB)

Screws that mustnot be removed




Optics cooling fan (FM2)

Optics rail (R)

Optics unit

Optics drive wire

Front

Note: 2 screws are located behind the ADB in the figureabove.



2-34

Removing and Reinstalling the CCD UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been

removed from the power outlet.

Caution: Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing

the CCD unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment

section.)

Procedure(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and

upper cover (center).

(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass

stopper plate.

(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove lens light

blocking cover 2.

(4) Remove the eight set screws, then remove lens light

blocking cover 1.

(5) Disconnect the connector (CN49).(6) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the fan

mounting plate.

Set screws

Set screws

Light blocking cover 2

Glass stopper plate

Set screws

Set

screwsSetscrews

Lens lightblockingcover 1

Connector (CN49) Set screws

Fan mounting plate

Set screws Set screws



2-35

MAIN BODY

Replacing the Exposure LampCaution:

• Be sure that the power cord has been removed

from the power outlet.

• DO NOT touch the glass of the exposure lamp with

bare hands.

Caution:

• Be sure to install the exposure lamp with themanufacturer's mark facing the front side of the main

body.

• The nipple on the exposure lamp must face the paper

feed side.

• Be sure to check the image after installing the exposure

lamp. (For details, refer to the adjustmentsection.)

Procedure

(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, platen

glass and the upper cover (center).

(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch on the main frame

fitted on the paper exit side.

(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove mirror supportplate 2.

(7) Disconnect the two connectors (CN420 and 412).

(8) Remove the two set screws, then remove the CCD

unit.

Connector (CN412)

(9) Reinstall the CCD unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Set screws

CCD unit

Electronic RDH

Connector (CN420)

Set screws

Mirror support plate 2

Reflector mirror 1

Exposure lamp

Lamp terminal

Spring

(4) To prevent the exposure lamp from falling out, insert a

sheet of paper from beneath reflector mirror 1 and

wrap it around the exposure lamp.

(5) Remove the spring, then slide the lamp terminal to the

rear and remove the exposure lamp. (Lift out the lamp

while holding it with the paper that you wrapped around

it.)

(6) Reinstall the exposure lamp in the opposite sequence

to removal.



2-36

Removing the Exposure UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Caution:

• Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure

unit. (For the method of installing this jig, refer to the

sub-section describing the method of installing the

exposure unit.)• Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing

the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment

section.)

Procedure

(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, upper

cover (center) and the operation panel.

(2) Remove the seven set screws, then remove the front

door and disconnect the five connectors (CN10, 212,

213 383 and 414).

Installing the Exposure UnitCaution:

• Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure

unit.

• Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing

the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment

section.)

Procedure

(1) Insert the jig into the exposure unit mounting position

from the front.

(2) Slide the exposure unit to the paper feed side until ittouches the jig.

(3) Install the exposure unit on the optics wire using the

four set screws.

Set screw

Wiringsecuring plate

Exposure unit

Set screws

Connector(CN212)

Set screws

Operation

panel

Set screws

Connector(CN212)

(3) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main body

frame on the paper exit side.

(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the wiring securing

plate and disconnect the connector (CN384).

(5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the exposure

unit.

Connector (CN414)

Connector(CN383)

Connector(CN10)

Connector(CN384)

Set screws

Exposure unit

Jig



2-37

MAIN BODY

Installing the optics wireCaution:

• When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to

run the wire tightly to ensure that it does not ride up the

side of the pulley.

• Be sure to perform image adjustment after replacing or

reinstalling the wire. (For details, refer to the adjustment

section.)

Procedure

(1) Remove the optics unit.

(2) Move the V mirror unit to the paper feed side, then

insert the jig from the front (through the V mirror unit)

and secure it in place (refer to the illustration on the

right).

(3) The optics wire has exposure unit mounting pieces

installed on it. The position of each mounting piece

differs depending upon whether the mounting piece is

at the front or the rear. Use the mounting piece that is

at the shorter distance from the metal bead at the end,

as the rear mounting piece.

(4) Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the

metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides

with the lug terminal. Place the metal bead midway

along the optics wire in the mounting hole of the drive

pulley, then wind five turns to the outside, and four

turns to the inside, starting from this point.

Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from

the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in

the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.

(5) Secure the outer wire, after it has been wound, on the

wire stopper via pulley 1 and the outside of V mirror

pulley.

(6) Pass the inner wire through the notch in the wire

stopper, reverse it at pulley 2, then pass it around the

inside of the V mirror pulley and around pulley 3, in that

sequence, and attach the lug terminal to the spring

securing plate. Temporarily secure the spring securing

plate with the screw.

(7) Insert the jigs into the exposure unit mounting positions

from the front.

Exposure unitV mirror unit

Jig

Note: The wire stopper is provided with two grooves. Use the

outer groove for the rear side, and the inner one for the

front side.

Connector(CN41)

Connector(CN388)

Connector(CN381)

Front cover

Front door

Set screws

Setscrews

Set screwsSet screws

Set screws



2-38

9 9 10

11

13

8

10

11

(8) Loosen each of the screws that you temporarily

secured, then attach the spring to the spring securing

plate and secure it once again.

(9) Mount the other wire in the same way.

Caution:

• Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the

metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides

with the wire terminal.

• Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from

the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in

the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.

E x p o

s u r e

u n i t

m o u n

t i n g p

i e c e

Optics wire (rear)

Rear

Pulley 3

Pulley 2

Spring securing plate

Set screws

Spring

Wirestopper

Optics wire (front)

Wire stopper

Metal bead

V mirror unit

Metal bead

Drive pulley

Pulley 1

5

6

8

35

6

4 4Front

Metal bead

Four turnsFive turns Four turns

Rear

Five turns

Metal bead

Wire stopperMetal bead

V mirror unit Pulley

Metal bead

Exposure unitmounting piece

Metal bead

Lug terminal

Optics wire (front)

Optics wire (rear)Pulley

Metal bead

Wire stopper

V mirror unit

Pulley 1

Spring securing plate

Pulley 3

Pulley 2



2-39

MAIN BODY

M12 (Optics Drive) Control

M12 (optics drive) is driven by the optics motor drive board

(OPMDB), and is controlled by the control board (CB).

Related signals are PS1 (optics overrun), PS2 (optics ADF and

EE), PS3 (shading), PS4 (paper supply restart), PS5 (optics

return), PS7 (optics timing) and PS8 (platen glass sensor).

OperationOperation of M12

M12 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven using

a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing through the

windings is switched according to the position of the rotor

which is detected by a sensor (magnetic sensor) inside the

motor.

FB



2-40

Scanning operation of the exposure unit

Scanning speed

Position of each sensor

Magnification Scanning speed

Forward 280 mm/sec (life size)

Return 1520 mm/sec

Home position sensor of the exposure unit

If the exposure unit is not in the home position when the

main switch is turned ON, M12 rotates at low speed in the

reverse direction until PS7 (optics sensor) is turned ON,

thus detecting the fact that the optics unit is in the homeposition.

Shading correction read operation

At the position where PS3 (shading) goes ON, the light

reflected from the white reference plate installed at the rear

of the original table is read.

Other operations

• During copying

When manual density has been selected

During a platen copy operation

Exposure unit

Exposure scan

Original placed on platen

Original conveyance

Exposure scan

Exposure scan

Exposure unit

Stop

Stop

AES mode

During a platen copy operation

Exposure scan

AES scan

Exposure unitOriginal placed on platen

2nd original feed

1st original feed

Copy button pressed

Press copy button

Shading correctionread operation

Home position(PS7 and PS5 ON)PS3

During an ADF copy operation



2-41

MAIN BODY

SignalsInput signals

• PS1 (PS1 −> CB)

This is the exposure unit overrun detection signal.[L]: The exposure unit is in the overrun position.

[H]: The exposure unit is not in the overrun position.

• PS2 (PS2 −> CB)

The brake is applied to M12 after the specified period

from when PS2 goes ON during the return scan of the

exposure unit. Also, when the ADF (1-1 mode) is used,

EE read starts when PS2 goes ON.

[L]: Exposure unit detected

[H]: Exposure unit not detected

• PS3 (PS3 −> CB)

This is the white reference plate read position detection

signal.

[L]: The exposure unit is in the white reference plate read position.

[H]: The exposure unit is not in the white reference

plate read position.

• PS4 (PS4 −> CB)

The timer that determines the 2nd paper feed start

timing starts when PS4 goes ON during the forward

scan of the exposure unit.



• PS5 (PS5 −> CB)

This signal is used to detect the return position and also

the home position of the exposure unit.



• PS7 (PS7 −> CB)

This signal is used to detect the return position and

also the home position of the exposure unit.



• PS8 (PS8 −> CB)

This signal is used to detect whether the original glass

is set or not.

[L]: Original glass detected

[H]: Original glass not detected

During an ADF copy operation (1-1)

Original conveyance

1st original feed

Stop

2nd original feed

Stop

Prescan

AES scan

Exposure scan

Exposure scan

AES scan

Stop

Stop

Exposure unit

During an ADF copy operation (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)

Original conveyance

1st original feed

2nd original feed

Stop

Exposure unit

AES scan

Exposure scan

AES scan

Exposure scan

Stop

Stop

Stop

• Book copy mode

When manual density has been selected

Original placed on platen

Copy button pressed

Exposure unit

Exposure scan (rear half)

Exposure scan (front half)

Original conveyance

Copy button pressed

Exposure unit

AES scan

Exposure scan (front half)

Exposure scan (rear half)

AES mode



2-42

• M12 DIR (OPMDB −> CB)

This is the M12 rotational direction detection signal.

[L]: Reverse rotation (return operation)

[H]: Forward rotation (forward operation)

• M12LD (OPMDB −> CB)

[H] is output when M12 reaches the specified speed.

• M12 MAG A/A' (M12 −> OPMDB)

• M12 MAG B/B' (M12 −> OPMDB)• M12 MAG C/C' (M12 −> OPMDB)

These are the output signals from the sensors (magnetic

sensors) contained in M12. OPMDB detects the

position of the rotor of the motor by means of these

signals, and switches over the M12 DRIVE A to C

output.

• M12 FG (M12 −> OPMDB)

This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed

sensor contained in M12. It is compared with the M12

CLK signal from the CB, and the output voltage adjusted

so that the feedback signal becomes the same as the

M12 CLK signal, thus controlling the rotational speed

of M12.

Output signals

• M12 DRIVE A, B, C (OPMDB −> M12)

This is the M12 drive signal. While M12 is rotating,

voltages are output sequentially from M12 DRIVE A to

C, and applied to M12.

The voltage from each output that is applied to M12

consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width

of this output changes according to the rotation

condition of M12, as shown in the figure, and as a

result the RMS value of the voltage applied to M12

changes, causing the speed to be regulated.

• M12 BRAKE (CB −> OPMDB)

This is the M12 brake control signal.

[L]: Brake OFF

[H]: Brake ON

• M12 NCR (CB −> OPMDB)

This is the M12 brake control signal.

• M12 MODE 0, 1, 2 (CB −> OPMDB)

This is the M12 rotational speed control signal.Up to eight rotational speed modes are activated by

different combinations of these three signals.

• M12 CONT (CB −> OPMDB)

This is the M12 ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: M12 ON

[H]: M12 OFF

• M12 CLK (CB −> OPMDB)

This is the M12 rotational speed control reference

clock signal.

• M12 F/R (CB −> OPMDB)

This signal is used to control the rotational direction of

M12.

[L]: Forward operation

[H]: Return operation



2-43

MAIN BODY

Exposure Control

Power is supplied to exposure lamp (L1) by means of the CVR

(constant voltage regulator) in DC power supply unit 2 (DCPS2),

and is controlled by the control board (CB).

OperationL1 light intensity control

The light intensity from L1 is determined by the output

voltage from the CVR circuit in DCPS2.

Rated output: 60 VDC

Protection from abnormality

• Hardware timer circuit

If L1 remains ON continuously for at least 40±8 seconds

for some reason or other, the hardware timer in the CVR

of DCPS2 operates, turning OFF the main relay (RL1).As a result, current to the AC loads including L1 is cut off.

• Temperature fuse

If L1 exceeds a certain temperature, f1 (optics temperature

fuse) melts, cutting off the current to L1. (f1 melting

temperature: 121°C)


• L1 FB (DCPS2 −> CB)

This signal informs the CB of the lit or unlit state of L1.

[L]: L1 ON

[H]: L1 OFF or broken

• RL1 INHIBIT (DCPS2 −> CB)

This signal turns OFF RL1 if an abnormality occurs inthe machine.

[L]: Abnormal

[H]: Normal

Output signal

• L1 CONT (CB −> DCPS2)

This is a control signal which turns L1 ON and OFF.

[L]: L1 ON

[H]: L1 OFF

• L1 DRIVE1, 2 (DCPS2 −> L1)

This is the L1 drive signal.

• RL1 DRIVE (CB −> DCPS2 −> RL1)

This signal controls RL1.

This signal becomes [H] and turns off RL1 if anabnormality occurs in the machine.



2-44

Original Read Control

The original is read by the A/D converter board (ADB) and the

CCD sensor installed on the ADB.

OperationThe light reflected off the exposed original passes through a

lens to the CCD sensor. The analog voltages that correspond

to the input light intensity are A/D-converted in the ADB, and

output to the image processing board (IPB).

Original read operation

The original read timing is as follows.

• During a platen copy operation

When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON.

• During an ADF copy operationWhen the exposure unit is +2 mm toward the paper

feed side from the position at which PS4 goes ON.

APS Control

APS takes place as a result of the signal read by the APS

sensor being sent to the control board (CB) when the original

cover is opened and closed.

Related signals are PS45 (APS timing 1) and PS44 (book

detection).

OperationAPS detection operation

APS detection is an operation that detects the paper size

according to the particular ON/OFF combination of PS41

(long), and PS42 (APS (inner)).

The APS sensor consists of LEDs and photosensors. APS

detection takes place as a result of the light emitted fromeach LED being reflected off the original and received by

the photosensor.

LED

P a p e r e x i t s i d e

Photosensor



2-45

MAIN BODY

The relation between each sensor and the paper size is

shown below.

APS detection timing

APS detection takes place when PS45 goes ON or PS44

goes OFF.

APS detection stops when PS45 goes OFF or PS44 goes

ON.


• PS41 (PS41 −> CB)This is the paper size detection signal.

[L]: Paper is detected.

[H]: Paper is not detected.

• PS42 (PS42 −> CB)

This is the paper size detection signal.

[L]: Paper is detected.

[H]: Paper is not detected.

• PS45 (PS45 −> CB)

This is the original cover opening/closing detection

signal.

It activates or deactivates the APS function.

[L]: ON (APS function activated)

[H]: OFF (APS function deactivated)

• PS44 (PS44 −> CB)

This is the original cover state detection signal.

This signal is used to detect the raised state of the rear

part of the original cover when a book or other thick

original is being copied.

When the rear part of the original cover is in a raised

state, PS44 is OFF, and [H] is output.

[L]: ON (APS function is activated)

[H]: OFF (APS function is deactivated)

PS45 goes ON

ADF(DF-306)

APS sensor

Paper size

11x17

8.5x14

8.5x11R

8.5x5.5R

8.5x11

8.5x5.5

C

PS41

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

C

PS42

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PS44



2-46

AES Control

AES control takes place during an AES scan as a result of the

CCD sensor reading the original density and selecting the

most suitable γ correction curve.

AES processing is done by the image processing board (IBP).

OperationAES detection operation

• During a platen copy operation

When the start print button is pressed, an AES scan

takes place, and the density is measured over the

range shown below.

AES sampling range

With APS detection: (document width-20mm) x

(document width-20mm)Without APS detection: (176mm-20mm) x (176mm-

20mm)

• ADF mode (1-1)

The read operation takes place from the point at which

PS2 (ADF-AES) goes ON during the return scan of the

exposure unit, either while the original is being

conveyed through the ADF or after the original has

been placed in it.

AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x L

• ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)

The density of the original is read during the AES scan

after the original has been placed in the ADF.

AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x (176mm-20mm)



2-47

MAIN BODY

WRITE UNITComposition

Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Scan Polygon mirror

(Rotational speed: 16535 rpm)

Light source Laser diodes (two)

(Output: max 15 mW)

Positioning Index sensor fine

adjustment prism

Laser beam combining Beam combining prism

*1: Path of laser beam

The light emitted to each semiconductor is sent to the OPC

drum via the collimator lens, compression prism, fine

adjustment prism, beam combining prism, cylindrical lens

1, polygon mirror, fθ lens unit, V mirror unit, cylindrical lens

2, and the 3rd mirror. The dust proof glass is positioned

between the polygon mirror and fθ lens unit, and betweenthe reflecting mirror and drum.

*1

*2

*3

Semiconductorlaser LD2

Fine adjustmentprism

OPC drum

Stepping motor

Collimatorlens unit

Cylindrical lens 1

fθ lens unit

V mirror unit


Collimator lensunit 2

Index mirror

Collimator lens unit 1 Cylindrical lens 2

3rd mirror

Polygon mirror

Index sensor board

Laser driver board 1

Polygon driver board

Laser driver board 2

Semiconductorlaser LD1

Compressionprism

Index mirror

Fine adjustmentprism

Beamcombining prism

Compressionprism

CY1 lens

V mirror unit

fθ lens unit

CY2 lens

Polygon mirror

3rd mirror

Glass cover

Index sensor

3rd mirror

2nd mirror

1st mirror



2-48

*2: Positioning

Each laser beam is positioned by the compression prism

and the fine adjustment prism.

This is adjustable only in the factory, not in the field.

*3: Combining the laser beams

The two laser beams are emitted at right angles with

respect to each other. The beam combining prism causesthem to be emitted parallel to one another.

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Write UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Warning:

• Do not energize the write unit when it is not in the

correct position.

• Do not remove the cover from the write unit other thanto clean the polygon mirror.

Procedure

(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and

platen glass.

Board cover

(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the board cover.

(3) Remove the 13 screws, then remove the board

protection cover.

Boardprotectioncover

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screws






2-49

MAIN BODY

(4) Disconnect the four connectors (CN421, 422, 423 and

424) from the image processing board (IPB).

(5) Loosen the four screws, then remove the upper coveron the right side.

(6) Remove the eight screws, then remove the write unit

cover.

(7) Disconnect the connector (CN95).

(8) Loosen the two screws, then pull out the write unit.

(9) Reinstall the write unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Cleaning the polygon mirrorProcedure

(1) Remove the write unit.

(2) Remove the five screws, then remove the write unit

cover.

Image processing board (IPB)

Connector(CN424) Connector

(CN423)

Connector(CN421)

Connector(CN422)

Write unitConnector(CN95)

Write unit cover

Screws

Write unit cover

ScrewsScrews

Screws

Screws

Screws



2-50

(4) Remove the screw, then remove board support piece

1.

(5) Remove the set screws, then pull out and remove the

electronic RDH.

(6) Reinstall the electronic RDH in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Electronic RDH

Board support piece 1

(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the polygon

mirror cover.

(4) Immerse a cotton stick in a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl

alcohol and acetone, then use it to clean the eight faces

of the polygon mirror.

Caution: Take care not to scratch the polygon mirror when

cleaning it.

Removing and Reinstalling the Electronic RDHCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Procedure

(1) Remove the top cover on the left side.


(3) Remove the eight screws, then remove the fanmounting plate.

Connector (CN49)

Fan mounting plate

Polygon mirror cover

Screws

Screws

Screws Screws

Screws

Screw



2-51

MAIN BODY

M5 (Polygon) Control

M5 (polygon) is driven by the polygon driver board (PMDB),

and is controlled by the control board (CB).

Operation• M5 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven

using a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing

through the windings is switched according to the position

of the rotor which is detected by a sensor (magnetic)

inside the motor.

This motor rotates the polygon mirror, causing the laser

beams from LDB1 and 2 (laser diode boards 1 and 2) to

be scanned in the axial direction of the drum. The speed

of the motor is maintained constant by PLL control.

• M5 is powered by 24 VDC. The rotational speed is asfollows.

Rotational speed

High speed (16,535 rpm)

One of the following four speeds can

be selected using the 25 mode.

• 14,000 rpm *

• 11,024 rpm *

• 8,000 rpm *

• Stop *

State of the machine

During copy

During idling

* If the item marked * is selected, the rotational speed of

M5 switches over after the lapse of the specified timefrom the end of the copy process. The specified time can

be selected using the 25 mode.

* (15 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec, 120 sec)

SignalsCB output signals

• M5 CONT (CB −> PMDB)

This signal controls the ON/OFF state of M5.

L: M5 ON

H: M5 OFF

• M5 CLK (CB −> PMDB)

This is a reference clock signal for PLL-controlling M5in the PMDB.

CB input signal

• M5 RDY (PMDB −> CB)

This signal indicates the rotation condition of M5.

L: Specified rotational speed

H: If the specified speed has not been reached

PMDB input signal

• M5 MAG A/A' (M5 −> PMDB)

• M5 MAG B/B' (M5 −> PMDB)

• M5 MAG C/C' (M5 −> PMDB)

These are output signals from the position sensors

(magnetic sensors) contained in M5. The PMDB detects

the position of the rotor of the motor by means of thesesignals, and switches over the M5 DRIVE A to C

output.

PMDB output signal

• VMAG- (PMDB −> M5)

This is the GND line to the rotor position sensors

(magnetic sensors) contained in M5.

• M5 DRIVE A to C (PMDB −> M5)

This is the drive output signal for M5. While M5 is

rotating, voltages are output sequentially from M12

DRIVE A to C, and applied to M5.

The voltage from each output that is applied to M5

consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width

of this output changes according to the rotation condition

of M5, as shown in the figure, and as a result the RMS

value of the voltage applied to M5 changes, causing

the speed to be regulated.



2-52

Image Write Control

The analog image data from the CCD sensor is A/D-converted

by the A/D converter board (ADB), then sent to the imageprocessing board (IPB) where it is data-processed. The

processed image data is converted into a laser beam and

applied to the drum with control signals from the CB. There are

two lasers which are used to write two lines of image data in a

single scan. The write start position of each laser is detected

by the index sensor board (INDXSB). The electronic RDH (E-

RDH) can store digitized image data. Various editing functions

can be carried out based on this data.

Operation

Image processingThe following processing is done by the image processing

board (IPB).

• Shading correction

Implementation timing

White correction

• When the machine is switched ON

• When the front door or the side door is opened

and closed

• Every 1000 copies

Black correction

• When the start print button is pressed

• Brightness/density conversion

• AES processing• Text/halftone dot identification

• Filtering

• Magnification change processing

• Copy γ correction

• Write density control



2-53

MAIN BODY

The following processing is performed by the E-RDH

(electronic RDH processing board).

• Error diffusion processing

• Data compression

The write operation takes place under instructions from the

CB after the above processing has been completed.

WriteThe image processing board (IPB) sends image data one pixel

at a time to LDB1 and LDB2 in accordance with control signals

from the control board (CB).

LDB1 and LDB2 cause the lasers to emit light pulses of a length

corresponding to the image data. This laser light illuminates

the drum.

• Automatic adjustment of laser beam intensity (APC)

The CB monitors the laser drive current at fixed intervals,

and maintains the light intensity at the correct value.

APC takes place at the following timing.

• Before Dmax/gray scale correction

• When the copy button is pressed

• After each two copies during a continuous copy

operation

• When the front door is opened and closed.

Note: MPC

MPC is the data (00-99steps) stored in the NVRAM in the main

body, which determines the LD output power to be adjusted

later by APC. It can be read out by 47-036, 47-037. MPC value

is sent from CB to IPB in case of step 1 or step 2 in APC above.

• Write timing

Axial direction of drum

In this machine, the INDEX signal from INDEXSB

determines the laser write start timing for each scan in

the axial direction of the drum.

Image area

Laser output

1

Laser output

21st scan 2nd scan

Symbol

a

b

b–c

c–d

d–e

Description

When laser goes ON during 1st scan

When index sensor goes ON

The timing at left is controlled by counting the

LD1 IRCLK and LD2 IRCLK signals. It differs

depending upon the paper size.

INDEX

Direction of rotation of drum

• When realtime output

• When superfine mode is selected.

• 1st copy in either normal or fine mode with

platen mode or RADF (1-1) mode.

When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON

• When data is output from the E-RDH memory

When the copy paper reaches the specifiedposition

• During paper feed from the tray, LCT or ADU:

After the specified period from when PS18 (no

feed) goes ON

• During bypass paper feed:

After the specified period from the start of

bypass paper feed

•Laser beam position correction

Axial direction of drum

The index sensor detects the magnitude of the

error. This error is corrected by changing the timing

of the light emission from the laser.

Direction of rotation of drumThe index sensor detects the degree of

misalignment, and M40 (laser correction motor)

changes the angle of the fine adjustment prism of

laser LD1, thus adjusting the beam in the up/down

direction.

SignalsCB output signals

• MEE V/V (CB −> IPB)

This signal determines the scanning area in the sub

scanning direction during the pre-scanning operation

(EE control). The period during which this signal is [L]

is judged to be the scanning range.

• M V/V (CB −> IPB)

This signal determines the scanning range in the sub

scanning direction during the exposure scan. The

period over which this signal is [L] is judged to be the

scanning range.

• M CLK CHG (CB −> IPB)

This is the clock frequency switching signal.

[H]: Low clock frequency

[L]: High clock frequency

• DCORR (CB −> IPB)

The black data collection trigger signal is used when

shading correction is taking place.• I YOBI 1 (CB −> IPB)

This is the spare input port.

• RXA 0, 1 (CB −> IPB)

This is the data that is transferred serially from the CB

to the IPB.

• MTN V/V (CB −> IPB)

This signal determines the patch output range in the

sub scanning direction while Dmax is being measured.

The period during which this signal is [L] is judged to be

the patch output range.



2-54

• MAPC CAL (CB −> IPB)

This is the APC and PWM calibration trigger signal.

• MIND CHG (CB −> IPB)

This signal selects the index signal.

[H]: External index signal

[L]: Internal index signal

• CORR (CB −> IPB)

The white data collection trigger is used when shadingcorrection is taking place.

• RESET (CB −> IPB)

This is the processing CPU reset signal (not used).

CB input signal

• IP REQ (IPB −> CB)

This is the processing board communications enable

signal.

• INDEX (IPB −> CB)

This is the write system index signal.

• TXA 0, 1 (IPB −> CB)

This is the data that is transferred serially from the IPB

to the CB.

• MPR (IPB −> CB)

This is the image processing board power supply

monitoring signal (connector check).

• O YOBI 1 (IPB −> CB)

This the spare output port.

IPB output signal

• M40 PWR A (IPB −> M40)

This is the M40 A phase drive signal.

• M40 PWR B (IPB −> M40)

This is the M40 B phase drive signal.

• M40 DRIVE A/A' (IPB −> M40)

This is the M40 A phase drive pulse signal.

• M40 DRIVE B/B' (IPB −> M40)

This is the M40 B phase drive pulse signal.

• LD1 APC CONT 1, 2 (IPB −> LDB1)

APC (laser light intensity automatic adjustment) of

LD1 takes place according to the combination of

these two signals.

• LD1 C/S (IPB −> LDB1)

This is the LD1 MPC signal.

• LD1 VIDEO (IPB −> LDB1)

This is the LD1 laser image data

• LD1 IRCLK (IPB −> LDB1)

This is the LD1 APC clock signal.• LD1 INC (IPB −> LDB1)


• LD1 U/D (IPB −> LDB1)


• LD2 APC CONT 1,2 (IPB −> LDB2)

APC of LD2 takes place according to the combination

of these two signals.

• LD2 C/S (IPB −> LDB2)


• LD2 VIDEO (IPB −> LDB2)

This is the LD2 laser image data.

• LD2 IRCLK (IPB −> LDB2)

This is the LD2 APC clock signal.

• LD2 INC (IPB −> LDB2)

This is the LD2 MPC clock signal.• LD2 INC (IPB −> LDB2)


• HLVL (IPB −> INDEXSB)

This is the 5 VDC for monitoring power supply.

IPB input signals

• LD1 ALM (LDB1 −> IPB)

This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the

laser drive current.

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal

• LD2 ALM (LDB2 −> IPB)

This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the

laser drive current.

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal

• M INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB −> IPB)

This is the index signal for detection of main scanning

skew.

• S INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB −> IPB)

This is the index signal for detection of sub scanning

skew.

• IPR (INDEXSB −> IPB)

This is the INDEXSB power supply monitoring signal

(connector check).

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal

• LD1 LPR (LDB1 −> IPB)

This is the LD1 power supply monitoring signal

(connector check).

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal

• LD2 LPR (LDB2 −> IPB)

This is the LD2 power supply monitoring signal

(connector check).

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal



2-55

MAIN BODY

DRUM UNIT

Composition

Mechanisms

Mechanism

Carriage supply

PCLAuxiliary separation

Method

Fixed rail

LEDSeparation claws*1

The drum unit of this machine is an integral assembly

consisting of the drum, and also the charge corona

unit, developing unit, cleaning unit, toner recycle unit

and the PCL which are installed around the drum.

*1: Auxiliary separation

Three separation claws separate the paper from

the drum and prevent paper jamming. These

claws are pressed against the drum or removed

from it by the ON/OFF operation of the separation

claw solenoid (SD4).

Also, while the swing latch installed in the swing

block is turning one revolution, the separation

claws slide about 7 mm, preventing a specific part

of the paper from becoming dirty and also preventing

the drum from being scratched.

Charge corona unit

Developing unit

PCL

Cleaning unit

Cleaning unit

PCL

Developing unit

Chargecorona unit

Transfer and separation corona unit

Drum

Separation claw solenoid

Separationsolenoid (SD4)

Swing block

Separation claws

Drum

PSL

Drum

Swing clutch

Separationclaw



2-56

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Drum UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Caution:

• The drum in this machine is more sensitive than the

drums used in previous machines. Before pulling out

the drum unit, be sure to cover the drum and store thedrum carriage in a dark place.

• Be careful not to rotate the drum when installing or

removing the drum unit. If you rotate the drum in the

direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates

during a copy operation, you may damaging the

cleaning blade.

Procedure

(1) Open the front door, loosen the set screw, release the

lock plate of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the

toner supply unit and secure it in place.(4) Remove the three screws, then slowly pull forward the

drum unit. (Raise the toner recycle unit and then

remove the screw at the center of the drum.)Caution: There is a possibility of the drum rotating in reverse,

so retain the cleaner idler gear to prevent the drum

from rotating.

Toner recycle unit

Drum unit

Cleaner idler gear

(5) Reinstall the drum carriage in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Drum cover

Conveyance lever

Toner supply unit

Lock plate

(2) Release the conveyance lever.

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the drum cover.

Screw

Screws

Screws



2-57

MAIN BODY

(5) Reinstall the drum in the opposite sequence to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Separation ClawsCaution:

• Take care not to damage the drum when removing the

separation claws.

• Be careful of the direction and position of the separation

claws when reinstalling the claws.

• Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum with the

bare hands.

Procedure

(1) Remove the drum carriage from the main body.

(2) Remove the drum from the drum carriage.

(3) Remove the spring.

(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the swing

block and switch clutch.(5) Remove the separation claw unit.

Drum fixing coupling

Cleaner idler gear

Drum

Swing clutch

Screws

Separation claw unit

Spring

Swing block

Removing and Reinstalling the DrumCaution:

• Do not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade with

bare hands, or damage these parts.

• When leaving the drum out, be sure to cover the drum

and store it in a dark place.

• When reinstalling the drum, cleaning blade and guide

roller, apply setting powder to the entire surface of thedrum and also to the cleaning blade regardless of

whether or not the parts are new or old. In addition,

apply toner to both ends of the cleaning blade.

• After applying setting powder to the drum, carry out the

following work before installing the drum unit on the

main body.

1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before

installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the

surface of the γ detecting sensor and the Dmax

sensor on the control board by using a piece of

cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing the

toner from adhering to the sensors.

2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the

charging corona unit and the developing unit

removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides of

the drum, then turn the drum one revolution. This

prevents setting powder from scattering onto the

charging corona unit, and other parts, and also

prevents image defects.

• Do not drop the blade spacer which is inserted on the

cleaning blade axis on the back side.

• When installing the drum, be careful of the orientation

of the drum. The end of the drum with the wider non-

image area is the front.

• When installing a new drum, be sure to enter code 91

of the 47 mode and reset the drum counter. (For

details, refer to the adjustment section.)

Procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.

(2) Remove the charge corona unit, developing unit and

cleaning blade from the drum unit. (For the sequence

of removing these parts, refer to the charge corona

unit, developing unit and cleaning/recycle unit sections.)

(3) Remove the cleaner idler gear and the drum fixing

coupling.

Note: Before removing the drum, in order to reprevent the

toner from dropping, rotate the cleaner idler gear (B)counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining

between the drum and guide roller. If the toner cannot

be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit, then

detach the drum keeping the toner on the place.

(4) Gently lift out the drum while holding it at both ends to

ensure that you do not damage the photosensitive

surface.



2-58

(6) Remove the spring and the e-ring from the separation

claw unit.

(7) Remove the three screws of the claws (one screw

each), then remove the three claws.

Removing and Reinstalling the PCLProcedure

(1) Remove the charge corona unit. (Refer to the charge

corona section for the method of removing the PCL.)

(2) Disconnect the connector (CN20) from the drum board.

(3) Press inward the hooks at the front and rear of the PCL

cover, and remove the PCL.

(8) Reinstall the separation claws in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Separation ClawSolenoid Press-fit Assembly

Procedure


(2) Remove the drum and separation claw unit from the

drum unit.


(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the separation

claw solenoid press-fit assembly.

Screws

Spring

Separation claws

(5) Reinstall the press-fit assembly in the opposite

sequence to removal.

E-ring

Connector (CN34)

Separation clawsolenoid press-fitass'y

Connector (CN20)

Charging wirecleaning motor (M7)


Drum

(4) Reinstall the PCL in the opposite sequence to removal.

Screws



2-59

MAIN BODY

Separation Claw Control

The separation claws are driven by SD4 (separation claws),and are controlled by the CB.

OperationDuring the separation discharge, SD4 goes ON, causing

the separation claws to touch the drum in order to help

separate the paper from the drum.

SignalsOutput signal

• SD4 DRIVE (CB −> SD4)

This is the SD4 drive control signal.

[L]: SD4 ON

[H]: SD4 OFF

PCL/PSL Control

The precharge exposure lamp (PCL) and transfer sync

exposure lamp (PSL) consist of LEDs which are controlled by

the control board (CB).

OperationThe PCL goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1

(main), and TSL with the drum motor (M4).

SignalsOutput signals

• PCL CONT (CB −> DB −> PCL)

This is the PCL ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: PCL ON

[H]: PCL OFF

• PSL CONT (CB −> PSL)This is the PSL ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: PSL ON

[H]: PSL OFF



2-60

Paper Guide Plate Control

A constant voltage is applied to the paper advance guide

plate in order to prevent toner from adhering to it.

Operation• ON/OFF timing

The paper guides go ON and OFF in synchronism with M4

(drum).

• Applied voltage

-500 VDC

SignalOutput signal

• GP CONT (CB −> HV1)

This controls the voltage that is applied to the paperadvance guide plate.

[L]: Voltage applied.

[H]: Voltage not applied.



MAIN BODY

2-61

CORONA UNIT SECTION

Composition

Mechanisms

Mechanism

Charge

Transfer

Separation

Method

Scorotron (DC negative corona discharge)

Discharge wire: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.Grid plate: stainless steel 0.1 mm dia.

With auto wire cleaner

DC positive corona discharge

Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.


AC corona discharge

Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.


*1

*2

*1: Cleaning the charge corona wires

The charge corona unit has a wire cleaner. The charge wire

cleaning motor causes the charge wire cleaning block to

move back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.

Charge corona unit Transfer and separation corona unit

PCL

Charge wire cleaning knob

Charge wire cleaningmotor (M7)

Charge corona unit

Drum board

Transfercorona unit

Separationcorona unit

Separation corona bridge

Transfer and separationwire cleaning motor (M8)

Charge wire cleaningblock

Charge wires

Charge wirecleaning motor (M7)



2-62

*2: Cleaning the transfer and separation wires

The transfer and separation corona unit has a wire cleaner.

The transfer and separation wire cleaning motor causes

the transfer and separation wire cleaning blocks to move

back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.

Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer andSeparation Corona UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Procedure

(1) Open the front door, and release the conveyance

lever.

(2) Remove the screw, then remove the transfer andseparation corona unit cover.

Screw

Transfer and separationcorona unit

Connector (CN168)

(5) Reinstall the transfer and separation corona unit in the

opposite sequence to removal.

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Charge Corona

UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Procedure



(3) Lift out the charge corona unit.

Connector (CN21)

(4) Reinstall the charge corona unit in the opposite


Separation wires

Transfer and separation

wire cleaning motor (M8)

Transfer wire cleaning block

Separation wirecleaning block

Transfer wire

Chargecorona unit

Transfer and separationcorona unit cover

Conveyance lever

Transfer and separationcorona unit

Screw


(4) Remove the screw, then pull forward and remove the

transfer and separation corona unit.



MAIN BODY

2-63

Removing and Reinstalling the Separation CoronaBridge

Procedure

(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit

(2) Push in the six hooks at the rear of the back plate while

grasping then with a pair of tweezers, and remove the

separation corona bridge.

(3) Reinstall the separation corona bridge in the opposite


Cleaning the Charge Control PlateProcedure

(1) Remove the charge corona unit.

(2) Remove the two springs, then slide the charge control

plate toward the charge wire cleaning motor andremove it.

(3) Remove dirt from the charge control plate by gently

dabbing it with a piece of cloth moistened with drum

cleaner, then remove any remaining dirt with a blower

brush.

(4) Reinstall the charge control plate in the opposite


Replacing Charge Wire Cleaning Block (B)Procedure


(2) Remove the charge control plate.

(3) Remove the two screws of the charge corona unit

(front).

(4) Lift out and remove charge wire cleaning block (B)

together with the spark arrestor plate (front).

(5) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (B) in the opposite


Separation corona bridge

Hooks

Hooks

Charge wire control plate

Charge corona unit

Spring

Narrow

Wide

Charge wirecleaning block (B)

Spark arrestor plate (front)

Charge corona unit (front)

Screws



2-64

Replacing the Charge WireProcedure



(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).

(4) Remove the screw, then remove the spark arrestor

plate (rear).

(5) Remove the spring, then remove the charge wires.

(6) Reinstall the charge wires in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Replacing Charge Wire Block (A)Procedure



(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).

(4) Remove the charge wires.

(5) Turn the charge corona unit upside down, then remove

the stop ring, and remove charge wire cleaning block(A).

(6) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (A) in the opposite


Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wire

Cleaning BlocksProcedure

(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.

(2) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).

(3) Lift out and remove the the transfer wire cleaning blockand separation wire cleaning block.

(4) Reinstall the transfer and separation wire cleaning

blocks in the opposite sequence to removal.

Spark arrestor plate (rear)

Spark arrestor plate (front)

Transfer wire cleaning block

Transfer andseparationwire cleaningmotor (M8)Separation wire

cleaning block

Spring

Charge wire

Charge wire cleaningblock (A)



Charge wire cleaningblock (A) (rear)

Stop ringScrew



MAIN BODY

2-65

Procedure:

(1) Turn the copier OFF and remove the transfer/separation

corona from the main body.

(2) Check the position of the wire pressure pad of the

separation cleaning block assembly (refer to the

illustration). If the position of the pad is correct, go to step

(3). If the pad is not positioned correctly, replace the

separation cleaning block assembly.

(3) Apply a very small amount of grease (Plas Guard No. 2

p/n 00GR00020) to the slide groove of the wire pressure

pad.

Notes:

a) Do not disassemble the separation cleaning

block assembly when applying the grease to the

wire pressure pad. Also, do not apply grease to the

wire pressure pad of the transfer cleaning block

assembly.

b) Once this procedure has been performed, it doesn'

need to be repeated at subsequent PMs.

c) Do not perform this procedure on the transfe

cleaning block assembly or its wire pressure pad. I

this pad is positioned poorly, it is because of the

incorrect position of the separation cleaning block

assembly.

Replacing the Transfer and Separation WiresProcedure

(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.

(2) Remove the separation corona bridge.

(3) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).

(4) Remove the transfer wire cleaning block and the

separation wire cleaning block.

(5) Remove the spark arrestor plate (rear).(6) Remove the spring from each wire, then remove each

wire. Each wire comes away together with the support

rubber.

Separationwire cleaningblock

Spark arrestorplate (rear)

Spark arrestorplate (front)

Transfer wirecleaning block

Support rubber

Support rubber

Separationcorona bridge

Separationwires

Transfer wire

Spring

Transfer andseparation motor(M8)

(7) Reinstall the transfer and separation wires in the

opposite sequence to removal.

Transfer/Separation Corona MaintenanceTo enhance its performance and to help prevent arcing, keeping

this unit clean is important. If the cleaning block is not cleaned

properly (this problem was corrected in machines with seria

number 25SE04289 and above), the cleaning block can bind

resulting in code F22-2 (cleaning wire trouble) or other related

codes such as F35-1, F36-1, and F43-2. Improper cleaning o

the corona wire will also result in poor separation.The procedure below should be performed when poo

separation occurs, when code F22-2 occurs, and/or when the

machine is scheduled for a PM.

Caution: When cleaning the transfer/separation corona unit,do

not remove the transfer guide plate assembly (p/n 25SA-2660)

This part must be installed with a special fixture to correctly

position the part; this cannot be done in the field. An improperly

installed transfer guide plate may affect transfer/separation

performance.

Revised 3/99



2-66

Charge Control

High voltage unit 1 (HV1), which controls charging, operates by

means of control signals from the control board (CB), and

outputs a high voltage to the charge wires.

OperationCharging

A scorotron charging method is used. 24 VDC input from the

CB is raised to a negative DC high voltage which is then

discharged.

Charging correction by means of the grid voltage

The grid voltage is output from HV1 to the charge plate.

Signal

Input signal• F SIG (HV1 −> CB)

[L] is output when the spark detection circuit operates

and forcibly turns OFF the charge output.

Output signals

• C CONT (CB −> HV1)

This is the charge and grid voltage ON/OFF control

signal.

[L]: Charge and grid voltage ON

[H]: Charge and grid voltage OFF

• C SHIFT (CB −> HV1)

The charge corona unit output level is controlled by

means of analog signals from the CB.

• G SHIFT (CB −> HV1)

The charge grid voltage output level is controlled by

analog signals from the CB.

C SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V

Charging output range -600 to -900 µA

G SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V

Grid voltage output range -500 to -900 V

Transfer/Separation Control

S SHIFT (AC)

T SHIFT

Transfer and separation is controlled by the CB and highvoltage unit 2 (HV2).

OperationTransfer

A positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.

Separation

An AC high voltage is used for separation.


• T SIG (HV2 −> CB)

[L] is output when the transfer spark detection circuit

operates.• S SIG (HV2 −> CB)

[L] is output when the separation spark detection

circuit operates.

Output signals

• T CONT (CB −> HV2)

This is the signal that turns the transfer corona unit ON/

OFF.

When this signal is [L], the transfer corona unit is ON.

• T SHIFT (CB −> HV2)

This is the transfer corona unit output level control

signal.

This signal controls the transfer corona unit output

level using analog signals from the CB.

Transfer shift output range 4 to 10 V

Transfer current voltage

output range50 to 600 µA

• S CONT (CB −> HV2)

This is the separation corona unit ON/OFF control

signal.

When this signal is [L], the separation corona unit is

ON.

Revised 3/99



MAIN BODY

2-67

• S SHIFT (AC) (CB −> HV2)

This is the separation corona unit output level control

signal.

This signal controls the separation corona unit output

level (AC component) using analog signals from the

CB.

• S SHIFT (DC) (CB −> HV2)

This is the separation corona unit output level control

signal.

This signal controls the separation corona unit output

level using analog signals from the CB.

S SHIFT (AC) output range 4 to 10 V

Separation AC voltage

output range4.0 to 5.7 kV

S SHIFT (DC) output range 4 to 10 V

Separation DC bias current

output range0 to -400 µA

M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control

M7 (charge wire cleaning) is driven by the drum drive board

(DCDB) via the drum relay board (DB). The DCDB is controlled

by the CB.

Operation• M7 is used to drive the charge wire cleaning unit. Also,

the drive voltage and rotational speed of M7 are as

follows.

Drive voltage: 12 VDC

• Cleaning of the charge wire takes place if the fusing

temperature is less than 50°C when the machine is

switched ON.

• Cleaning operation

The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front sideof the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.

Forward stroke of cleaning operation

The forward stroke takes place when the M7 F/R signa

from the CB is [L] (forward rotation) and also the M7

CONT signal is [L].

Return stroke of cleaning operation

The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place

when the M7 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse

rotation) and also the M7 CONT signal is [L].

Home position Rear

Cleaning (forward)

Cleaning (return)

Home position (forward

stroke)Home position (return stroke)

Revised 3/99



2-68

M7 stop conditions

The M7 CONT signal becomes [H] and M7 stops when

the M7 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M7

is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.


• M7 F/R (CB −> DCDB)This is the signal that determines the rotational direction

of M7.

L: Forward direction (home position −> rear)

H: Reverse direction (rear −> home position)

• M7 CONT (CB −> DCDB)

This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M7.

L: M7 ON

H: M7 OFF

• M7 DRIVE (DCDB −> DB −> M7)

This is the M7 drive signal.

Input signal

• M7 LD (DCDB −> CB)

If M7 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changesthe direction of rotation of M7, or stops it.

M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)Control

M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) is driven by the drum

drive board (DCDB) which is controlled by the control board

(CB).

Operation• M8 is used to drive the transfer/separation wire cleaning

unit. The drive voltage and rotational speed of M8 are as

follows.

Drive voltage: 12 VDC

• Cleaning of the transfer/separation wire takes place if the

fusing temperature is less than 50°C when the machine is

switched ON.

• Cleaning operation

The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side

of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.

Forward stroke of cleaning operation

The forward stroke takes place when the M8 F/R signal

from the CB is [L] (forward rotation), and also the M8CONT signal is [L].

Return stroke of cleaning operation

The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place

when the M8 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse

rotation), and also the M8 CONT signal is [L].

M8 stop conditions

The M8 CONT signal becomes [H] and M8 stops when

the M8 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M8

is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.


• M8 F/R (CB −> DCDB)

This is the signal that determines the rotational direction

of M8.

L: Forward direction (home position −> rear)

H: Reverse direction (rear −> home position)


This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M8.

L: M8 ON

H: M8 OFF

• M8 DRIVE (DCDB −> DB −> M8)

This is the M8 drive signal.

Input signal

• M8 LD (DCDB −> CB)If M8 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changes

the direction of rotation of M8, or stops it.

Home position Rear

Cleaning (forward)

Cleaning (return)

Home position (forward stroke)

Home position (return stroke)

Revised 3/99



MAIN BODY

2-69

DEVELOPING UNIT

Composition

Mechanism

Mechanism

Developing

Developing biasDeveloper agitation

Method

2-component developer

DC negativeMain agitation;

Auxiliary agitation

Developing unit driveThe drive for the developing unit is divided into the drive for

the developing sleeve and that for the agitating section.

These parts are driven by the developing drive motor (M3)

and the agitator screw motor (M35), respectively.

Flow of developerThe developer inside the developing unit is supplied to the

developing sleeve by the agitator wheel, and maintained at

a constant thickness by the developing regulation plate

(bristle height regulation plate). The developer remainingon the developing sleeve is returned to the agitator screw.

Developing sleeve

Developing unit cover

Drum

Agitator screw

Toner density sensor(TDS)

Agitator screw

Developing sleeve

Toner absorption duct

Developing regulating plate

Separation coronabridge (upper)

Agitator wheel

Toner absorption duct

Developerregulation plate Agitator wheel



2-70

Disassembly/AssemblyScrews that must not be removed

(1) The two screws of the developer regulation plate

(2) The set screw for adjusting the magnet angle

Removing and Reinstalling the Developing UnitProcedure


(2) Release the developing push pressure levers (front

and rear). Then, disconnect the density sensor

connector.

(3) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.

Replacing the developerCaution:

• When replacing the developer, take care that dirt does

not become mixed with it.

• If the developing sleeve is rotated, the developing

gear rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Never

rotate the developing gear in the clockwise

direction.Screws that must not be removed

Screws that must not be removed

Procedure


(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.

(3) Release the hooks on the developing unit cover, then

lift up and remove the cover.

Hooks

(4) Reinstall the developing unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Developing gear

Developing sleeve

Developing unit

Developing push pressure lever



MAIN BODY

2-71

(4) Tilt the developing unit, then rotate the developing

gear in the counterclockwise direction until all of the

developer adhering to the inside of the developing unit

and the magnet roller is discharged.

(5) Add fresh developer evenly from the top of the agitator

screw.

(6) Rotate the agitator gear counterclockwise until all of

the developer enters the developing unit.

(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) until all of the developer has

been supplied to the developing unit.

(8) Rotate the developing gear in the counterclockwise

direction, and confirm that the developer bristles along

the entire length of the developing sleeve.

(9) Install the developing cover, then install the developing

unit on the drum unit.

Removing and Reinstalling the Toner ControlBoard Unit

Procedure


(2) Remove the drum from the drum unit.

(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the board

cover.

Developer

Developing gear

Developing gear

Developing sleeve

Agitator gear

Board coverScrews



2-72

M3 (Developing Drive) Control

M3 (developing drive) is controlled by the CB via the DC driverboard (DCDB).

OperationM3 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the developing

sleeve. M3 is PLL-controlled by feedback signals from a

speed sensor installed inside M3 itself, maintaining it at a

constant speed.

M3 goes ON after the specified time from when the start

print button is pressed, and goes OFF again after the

specified time from the completion of charge control.

Signals

Input signal• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)

This signal becomes [L] when M3 reaches the specified

speed.

Output signals



[L]: M3 ON

[H]: M3 OFF

• M3 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M3)

This is the M3 rotational speed control reference clock

signal.

• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)

This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switchingsignal.

[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm

[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm

(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the toner

control board unit.

(5) Disconnect the connector (CN19) from the toner control

board.

(6) Reinstall the toner control board unit in the opposite


Connector (CN19)

Toner control board unit

Screws



MAIN BODY

2-73

[5] M35 (Agitator Screw) Control

M35 (agitator screw) is controlled by the CB via the DC driverboard (DCDB).

OperationM35 is a 24 V DC motor which drives the agitator screw and

the agitator wheel. M35 is PLL-controlled using feedback

signals from the speed sensor installed inside M35,

maintaining it at a constant speed.


goes OFF again when the last copy has been exited.

If the upper fixing roller does not reach the set temperature

within the specified time from the start of warmup, M35

goes ON/OFF in synchronism with M1 (main) until it goes

OFF at the completion of warmup.

SignalsInput signal

• M35 LD (M35 −> DCDB −> CB)


Output signal



[L]: M35 ON

[H]: M35 OFF

Developing Bias Control

The developing bias is controlled by the CB via high voltagepower supply 1 (HV1).

OperationThe developing bias is applied to the sleeve in synchronism

with M3 (developing drive).

Signals

Output signals• B CONT (CB −> HV1)

This is the developing bias ON/OFF control signal.

When this signal is [L], the developing bias goes ON,

and a high voltage is output.

• B SHIFT (CB −> HV1)This signal controls the output level of the developing

bias by means of analog signals from the CB.

B SHIFT output range 2 to 8 V

Bias voltage output range -400 to -700 VDC

ß



2-74

SignalsInput signals• TDS ANG (TDS −> CB)

An analog voltage proportional to the toner density is

output.

• M10 LD (M10 −> DCDB −> CB)


• M35 LD (M35 −> DCDB −> CB)[L] is output when M35 reaches the specified speed.

Output signals

• TDS CONT (CB −> TDS)

This is the TDS output voltage adjustment signal.

Output voltage adjustment: 4.9 to 9.8 V



Toner is supplied when M10 is ON.

[L]: M10 ON

[H]: M10 OFF



Toner is supplied when M35 is ON.

[L]: M35 ON

[H]: M35 OFF

Toner Density Control

The toner density is controlled by the toner density sensor

(TDS), M35 (agitator screw), M10 (toner supply) and the CB.

OperationToner density detection

The TDS detects the density of the toner in the developing

unit using an L detection method, and outputs an analog

voltage signal that is proportion to the density to the CB.

The CB compares the detected voltage with the reference

voltage corresponding to the initial density of the developer,

and judges the necessity of supplying toner.

Toner supply operation

M10 is driven by 24 VDC supplied from the DC driver board

(DCDB).

• When the power is switched ON

M35 (agitator screw) starts to rotate as soon as the

machine is switched ON, then after 3 minutes the toner

density is read. This density is compared with the initial

density of the developer, and if the density is low, toner

supply takes place.

• During a copy operation

The relationship between the TDS output voltage and

the toner supply time is as follows.

Sensor output voltage Supply time2 V or less 0 sec

2 to 2.11 V 0.24 sec

2.12 to 2.19 V 0.48 sec

2.20 to 2.29 V 0.72 sec

2.30 to 2.37 V 0.96 sec

2.38 to 2.45 V 1.20 sec

2.46 V or more 1.80 sec



MAIN BODY

2-75

Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control • Implementation timing


• Every 1000 copies


• Dmax sig (TCSB −> CB)

This is the output voltage of the Dmax value detectionsensor on the TCSB.

Reference voltage: 1.5 V

• Dmax MONI (TCSB −> CB)

This signal monitors the light reflected from the surface

of the drum (without toner), and corrects the voltage

applied to the Dmax detection LED (calibration).

Reference voltage: 6 V (reflection from clean drum)

• DRUM JAM (TCSB −> CB)

This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrapping

around the drum. If it is more than 4.3 V, the CB judges

that a jam has occurred.

Implementation timing

Calibration takes place before Dmax correction.

• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)


• M4 LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)


Output signal

• Dmax LED CONT (CB −> TCSB)

DC voltage is supplied to the LED of PD1 by this line.

CB changes this voltage until Dmax MONI signal

becomes 6V.



[L]: M3 ON

[H]: M3 OFF



signal.

• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)

This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switching

signal.

[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm

[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm



[L]: M4 ON

[H]: M4 OFF• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)

This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.

Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec

• DRUM JAM CONT (CB −> TCSB)

This signal controls the ON or OFF state of the wrapping

jam detection LED.

[L]: LED ON

[H] LED OFF

Dmax control is done by the toner control sensor board

(TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and so on. These

parts are controlled by the CB.

OperationDmax control is intended to control the maximum density

for each machine based on the reference level.

• Contents of implementation

Latent images are created several times at the

maximum exposure, the images are developed whilethe rotational speed of the sleeve is varied, then each

density is read by the PDI on the TCSB.

The rotational speed of the sleeve when the density

reaches the reference level is stored in memory as the

optimum sleeve speed, then subsequently developing

is carried out at this sleeve speed until Dmax correction

takes place next.

Revised 3/9



2-76

Gray Scale Correction Control

Gray scale correction control is done by the toner control

sensor board (TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and

so on. These parts are controlled by the CB.

OperationThe gray scale characteristics of the toner density versus

exposure amount at the image forming section of eachmachine is detected, and gradation correction processing

carried out in order to obtain a linear relation between the

original density and the copy density.

C o p y d e n s i t y

Original density

• Contents of implementation

Exposure is performed while the laser exposure is

varied over several steps, and development is

performed at the sleeve speed resulting from Dmax

correction.

Subsequently, each density is read by PD2 on the

TCSB, and the toner density and the gradation

characteristics of the toner density is detected.The gradation characteristics obtained here are used

as the correction values for the laser exposure amount.

• Implementation timing


SignalsInput signal

• γ signal (TCSB −> CB)

This is the output voltage from the gray scale detection

sensor (PD2) on the TCSB.

• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)


• M4 LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)


Output signal

• γ LED CONT (CB −> TCSB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for the gray scale

detection LED.

[L]: LED ON

[H]: LED OFF



[L]: M3 ON

[H]: M3 OFF



signal.

• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)

This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switching

signal.

[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm

[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm



[L]: M4 ON

[H]: M4 OFF

• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)

This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec



MAIN BODY

2-77

FM30 (Developing Suction) Control

FM30 (developing suction) is controlled by the CB via the DCdriver board (DCDB).

OperationFM30 is a 24 V DC motor.

It goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1 (main).


• FM30 LD (FM30 −> DCDB −> CB)

[L] is output when FM30 reaches the specified speed.

Output signals

• FM30 CONT (CB −> DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM30.[L]: FM30 ON

[H]: FM30 OFF

• FM30 DRIVE (DCDB −> FM30)

This is the drive control signal for FM30.

[L]: FM30 OFF

[H]: FM30 ON

• FM30 H/L (DCDB −> FM30)

This is the FM30 rotational speed control signal.

This signal is always [L].

24VDC



2-78

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Composition

Mechanism

Toner supply

Toner level detectionToner agitating

Toner box

Toner leakageprevention

Mechanisms

*1

*2

Method

Screw conveyance

Piezoelectric method 185g±50gAgitator plate

Capacity 1330g

Toner supply shutter

*2: Toner supply shutterWhen installing the toner cartridge, move the toner supply

unit forward. This causes the toner supply port to close,

preventing leakage of toner. When you return the toner

supply unit to the main body (normal position), the toner

supply port coincides with the developing unit.

*1: Toner supply• The rotational force of the toner supply motor is

transmitted via gears to the toner conveyance screw

and the toner agitator shaft, causing the shaft to rotate.

• The toner that has been agitated by the plate installed

on the toner agitator shaft is supplied to the developing

unit.

Toner supply motor

Toner supply door

Toner box

Toner level detecting sensor (TLD)

Shutter

Toner conveyance screw

Shutter

Toner supply port



2-79

MAIN BODY

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Toner Supply Unit

Procedure

(1) Open the front door, loosen the screw, release the lock

of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the toner

supply unit.

(2) Loosen the screw shown at top left of the figure, and

remove the screw shown at bottom right, then removethe cover of the toner supply unit.

(4) Close the toner supply unit, then remove the e-ring.

(5) Pull out the shutter toward the bottom, then remove the

toner supply unit.

E-ring

Shaft

(3) Disconnect the two connectors (CN17 and 14).

Connector (CN17)

Connector (CN14)

(6) Reinstall the toner supply unit in the opposite se-

quence to removal.Toner supply unit cover

Screw

Screw



2-80

Toner Level Detection Control

Toner level detection control is done by the toner level detecting

sensor (TLD) and the CB.

OperationToner level detecting sensor

A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD.

When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low, the

supply toner signal is output to the CB. As a result, a

message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VRD2) con-

nected to OB2 (operation board 2).

Detection timing

The detection timing is as follows.

• When the machine is switched ON

• When the front door is opened and closed

• During a copy operation

SignalsInput signal

• TLD (TKD −> CB)

When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low,

this signal becomes [L], and a message is displayed on

the LCD connected to OB2.



MAIN BODY

2-81

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT

Composition

Mechanism

Drum cleaning

Toner recycle

Toner collection

Method

Cleaning blade

(weight type)Screw conveyance to the

developing unit

Toner guide roller

Mechanisms • Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,

carry out the following work before installing the drum

unit on the main body.


installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the

the surface of the γ detecting sensor and the

Dmax sensor on the control board by using a

piece of cloth moistened with alcohol, thus

preventing toner from adhering to the sensors.

2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the


removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides

of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.

This prevents setting powder from scattering onto

the charging corona unit and also prevents image

defects.

• Take care that the blade spacer mounted on the

cleaning blade shaft at the back does not drop out.

Note: Before removing the drum, in order to prevent the

toner from dropping, rotate cleaner gear (B)

counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining

between the drum and the guide roller. If the toner

cannot be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit,

then detatch the drum keeping the toner in place.

Cleaning blade

Toner conveyancescrew

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Cleaning BladeCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-

plugged from the power outlet.

Caution:

• Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade with bare

hands.

• When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and theguide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and the

cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless of

whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old.

Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning blade.

guide roller

Cleaning blade

Toner conveyance screw

Toner recycle screw



2-82

Procedure

(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit.

(2) Remove the charging corona unit.

(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the cleaner

cover.

Cleaner cover

Set screws

(6) Remove the screw, then remove the cleaning blade

from the blade mounting plate.

(7) Remove the blade spacer from the cleaning blade.

Blade spacer

Cleaning blade

Blade mountingplate

(4) Remove the blade rotation shaft.

Caution: Take care that the blade spacer does not drop out.

(5) Lift out the blade mounting plate.

Blade spacer

(8) Reinstall the cleaning blade in the opposite sequence

to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Guide RollerCaution:

• When installing the guide roller, it is necessary to set

the drum accurately in the center position. When the

drum used in this machine is removed, the drive shaft

remains in the main body, hence it is necessary to

center the drum using the two jigs inside the drum

cover.

Jig (large)Jig (small)

Drum cover

Blade rotationshaft bearing

Screw

Blade mounting plate



MAIN BODY

2-83

• When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and the

guide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and

also the cleaning blade with setting powder, regard-

less of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new

or old. Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning

blade.

• Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,

carry out the following work before installing the drumunit on the main body.


installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the

surface of the γ detecting sensor and the Dmax

sensor on the control board by using a piece of

cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing

toner from adhering to the sensors.

2) After installing hte drum in the drum unit, with the


removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides

of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.

This prevents setting powder from scattering onto

the charging corona unit and also prevents image

defects.

Procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit.

(2) Remove the charge corona unit, the blade mounting

plate, the developing unit and the drum from the drum

unit.

Note: Before removing the drum, rotate cleaner idler gear

(B) counterclockwise in order to prevent toner from

dropping to the bottom of the unit, and also remove

any toner between the drum and the guide roller. If

the toner cannot be removed, rotate the drum

clockwise a bit, then detatch the drum keeping the

toner in place.

(3) Remove cleaner idler gear (B) and the two springs.

(4) Remove the left and right screws (one each), then

remove the left and right shaft positioning pieces.

(5) Lift out the guide roller.

Shaft positioning piece

(6) Remove any toner that has dropped off the guide

roller.

(7) Install the guide roller and the two shaft positioning

pieces, then secure them temporarily with the two

screws.

Shaft positioning piece

(8) Install the drum, then insert the centering jigs into both

sides of the drum.

(9) Install the two springs, bring the guide roller into

contact with the drum, then secure the guide roller

securely by fully tightening the two screws that you

secured temporarily.

(10)Install the cleaning blade.

(11)Rotate the drum one revolution.

(12)Remove the centering jigs from both sides of the drum

and store them inside the drum cover.

(13)Install the charging corona unit and developing unit.

(14) Install the drum unit in the main body.

Screw

Screw

Springs

Clean idler gear (B)

Drum

Jig (small)

Jig (large)

Guide roller



2-84

Mechanism

Paper stack

Paper lift pressure

reduction

Paper lift-up

Double feed prevention

Cassette loading1st paper feed

PAPER FEED UNIT

Composition

*1

*2

*3

Method

Tray (2-stage)

Swivel roller

Paper lift-up plate

Torque limiter

Front loadingFeed roller, 1st paper feed sole-

noid

Mechanisms

*4

*5

Method

Registration roller, 2nd paper feed

clutch

Feed roller, bypass paper feed sole-

noid

Cassette detection switch

(upper cassette: tact switch,(lower cassette: write paper size to

memory.)

Index sheet

Mechanism

2nd paper feed

Multi tray paper

feed

Paper size

detection

Remaining paper

indication

Double feed prevention roller

Bypass feed rollerDouble feed prevention roller

Feed roller

Paper feed roller

Paper feed roller

Feed roller

Double feedprevention roller

Paper feed motorBypass plate

1st paper feed solenoid(upper)

1st paper feed solenoid(lower)

Paper lift-up plate

Paper lift-up plate

Paper feed

clutch (lower)

Conveyanceclutch

Paper feedclutch (upper)

Bypassclutch

Bypasspaper feedsolenoid

Bypass feed roller

Upper traymotor

Lower traymotor

2nd paper feed clutch

2nd paper feed



MAIN BODY

2-85

*1: Swivel rollerThe paper feed direction and the cassette loading direction

are at right angles to each other. Consequently, if the feed

roller is fixed, it will touch the paper when the cassette is

removed, resulting in possible paper jamming. To prevent

this, the swivel roller (paper feed roller) is designed so that

it drops down and touches the paper only when paper feed

is taking place.

*3: Paper up/down base release operationWhen the tray is being removed, the projection on the right

side of the tray strikes the paper up/down base release

lever, causing the paper lift-up gear to be disengaged by

the gear coupling lever. As a result, the up/down base falls

under its own weight.

Paper feed roller

Paper feed swivel plate

Paper feed solenoid

*2: Paper lift-upWhen the paper feed tray is installed, the paper lift-up plate

is moved by the tray motor, paper feed idler gear and the

paper lift-up gear, causing the paper in the tray to be fed

automatically to the paper feed position.

Paper

Swivel roller

Paper lift-up plate

Tray projection

*4: Paper size detectionThe side guide and rear guide of the upper tray move,

causing the paper size detection knob to move as well. As

a result, the switch on the detection board is turned ON/

OFF. In this way, paper size detection takes place auto-

matically.

Paper size detection knob

Up/downbase releaselever



2-86

*5: Remaining paper indicationThe amount of paper remaining in the tray can be checked

by looking through the remaining paper indicator window.

The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the

up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused

to slide by a tension spring.

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Paper Feed UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Open the front door; then pull out the upper/lower tray

in the forward direction.

(2) Loosen the five screws; then remove the right sideupper cover.

(3) Loosen the two screws; then remove the right side

lower cover.

(4) Disconnect the two connectors (CN7 and CN144)

connected to the control board, and also the

intermediate connector (CN33); then remove the paper

feed wiring from the cord clamp.

(5) Remove the four screws; then remove the paper feedunit.

(6) Reinstall the paper feed unit in the opposite sequence

for removal.

Index sheet

Tension spring

Tray

Remaining paperdetection lever

Right side lower cover

Screws

Screws

Connector(CN7)

Screws

Connector(CN144)

Paper feed andconveyance door

Connector (CN33)

Screws

Right sideupper cover

Screw (behindbypass feed)



MAIN BODY

2-87

Removing and Reinstalling the Bypass Feed Basea. Procedure

(1) Remove the paper feed unit.

(2) Remove the screw and bypass feed base shaft bear-

ing, then remove the bypass feed base.

(4) Remove each e-ring, then pull out each roller from the

shaft.

(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (paper feed rubber

and paper supply rubber).

Paper feed rubberBypass paperfeed MC

(3) Reinstall the bypass feed base in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Replacing the Rubber of the Bypass Feed Roller/

Bypass Paper Feed RollerProcedure


(2) Disconnect the connectors of the bypass paper feed

MC and the bypass no paper detecting PS (CN233

and 47).

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the bypass paperfeed unit.

(6) Reinstall each rubber in the opposite sequence to

removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark

on each rubber.)

Replacing the rubber (paper supply rubber) of thebypass feed double feed prevention roller

Procedure

(1) Remove the bypass paper feed unit.

(2) Remove the bypass feed base.

(3) Cut the three wiring bands so as to free the wiring.

(4) Remove the e-ring, then remove the bypass feed lift-

up gear.

Wiring

Wiring bands

Bypass feed top plate

E-ring

Bypass feed lift-up gear

Bypass paper feed roller

E-ring

Paper supply rubber

Bypass feed roller

Paint mark

Bypass feed base

Bypass feed baseshaft bearing

Screw

Bypass feed roller

Bypass no paper detecting PS

Bypass paper feed MC

CN47

CN233

Screw



2-88

(5) Remove the spring, then remove the e-ring, and

remove the actuator.

(6) Pull out the pin.

(7) Remove the four screws, then remove the bypass feed

top plate.

(8) Remove the four screws, then free the bypass feed

bottom plate.

(9) Lift the bypass feed bottom plate using the shaft side

as a pivot.

(10)Remove the e-ring.

(11)Open the guide plate to the bottom, then remove thedouble feed prevention roller.

(12)Remove the paper supply rubber from the double feed

prevention roller.

(13)Reinstall the bypass double feed prevention roller

rubber. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark on

the rubber.)

Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Paper Feed

Roller and the Feed RollerProcedure


(2) Remove the three screws, then remove the upper

cassette rail (front).

Screws

Cassette rail (front)

Actuator

Bypass feed topplate

Shaft

Bypass feed bottom plate

E-ring

Spring

Guide plate

Bypass feed bottom plate

E-ringPaint mark


Paper supply rubber

Pin

Screws (at opposite side as well)

Screws (at opposite side as well)

Screw



MAIN BODY

2-89

Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Stage PaperFeed Double Feed Prevention Roller (double feed

prevention rubber)Procedure


(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feed

prevention roller unit.

Double feed prevention roller unit

(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft and

remove the double feed prevention roller.

(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the

double feed prevention roller.

E-rings

Shaft


Double feed rubber

(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to


on the rubber.)

Paint mark

(3) Remove the two e-rings, then shift the left and right

shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper

stage 1st paper feed roller unit.

E-ring

Paper feed roller

Shaftbearing

Feed roller

Shaft bearing

E-ring

(4) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, the

paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the

paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.

(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)

and the double feed prevention rubber).

E ring

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Shaft bearing

Paper feedreferenceactuator

Shaft bearing

Paper feed roller

(feed rubber (A))

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Shaft bearingFeed roller(double feedprevention rubber)

Shaft bearing

Paint mark



on each rubber.)

Screws



2-90

Replacing the Rubber for the Lower Paper FeedRoller and the Feed Roller

Procedure


(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).

(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the lower

cassette rail (front).








on each rubber.)

Replacing the Lower Stage Paper Feed DoubleFeed Prevention Roller (Double Feed PreventionRubber)

Procedure


(2) Remove the upper and lower cassette rails (front).

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feedprevention roller unit.

(4) Remove the three e-rings, then shift the left and right

shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the lower


Screws

Cassette rail (front)

Set screw

E-ring

Shaftbearing

Paper feed roller

E-ring

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Shaft bearing


Shaft bearing

Paper feed roller(feed rubber (A))

Shaft bearing

E-ring


Shaft bearing

Paint mark


Screws



2-91

MAIN BODY

(4) Reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch in the

opposite sequence to removal. (Do not forget to insert

the pin inside of clutch.)





Removing and Reinstalling the 2nd Paper FeedUnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been


Procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit, transfer/separation unit, and

paper feed unit.

(2) Remove the flywheel.(3) Disconnect the connector (CN86).

(4) Remove the screw, then remove the rotation stopper

of the 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3).

Caution: DO NOT touch the drum drive gear with a screw-

driver when removing the screws.

(5) Loosen the screw, then remove the 2nd paper feed

clutch and the gear. (Clutch and gear are one part.)

E-rings

Shaft


Double feed rubber

Connector (CN86)2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)



on the rubber.)

Replacing the Intermediate Conveyance ClutchProcedure



(3) Remove the e-ring, then remove the intermediate

conveyance clutch (MC8).

Connector (CN234)

E-ringsintermediate conveyanceclutch (MC8)

2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)

Gear

Screw

Rotationstopper

Drum drive gear

Screw

Paint mark



2-92

(6) Remove the three intermediate connectors (CN42, 71

and 85).

(7) Remove the two screws on the front and back, thenpull out and remove the 2nd paper feed unit.

Connector (CN42)

Connector (CN71)

Connector (CN85)

(8) Reinstall the 2nd paper feed unit in the opposite


Removing and Reinstalling the Upper TrayProcedure

(1) Withdraw the upper tray, then remove the three screws.

(2) Withdraw the upper tray further, then lift it out.

2nd paper feed unit

Screw

Upper trayScrew

Screws

(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Lower TrayProcedure

(1) Withdraw the lower tray, then remove the three screws.

(2) Withdraw the lower tray further, then lift it out.

Lower tray

Screws

Screw

(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to

removal.



2-93

MAIN BODY

The 1st paper feed takes place as a result of the transmission

of drive force from M13 (paper feed) via MC5 (1st paper feed(upper)), MC6 (1st paper feed (lower)) and MC7 (bypass paper

feed) to the respective paper feed rollers. At this time, the

paper feed rollers are not touching the paper, hence the swivel

roller and the by-pass plate are moved up and down by SD1

(1st paper feed (upper), SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)) and SD3

(bypass paper feed), causing each roller to touch the paper.

Control of each roller is done by the control board (CB). The

2nd paper feed is done by MC3. Related signals are PS11

(conveyance door), PS14 (registration), PS18 (no feed), PS19

(optics sync), PS20 (pre-feed (upper)), PS21 (pre-feed (lower))

and PS30 (bypass).

Operation

1st paper feed operation timing• 1st copy start

Timing that is determined by the P counter from when

the charging corona unit goes ON

• 2nd copy start

After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-

tion) goes ON for the 1st copy

• OFF timing

Specified count on the P counter

Intermediate conveyance control

The paper fed from the upper and lower trays is conveyed

by the rotational power of M13 to the 2nd paper feed section

by MC8 (conveyance). This conveyance section is alsoused for feeding paper from the ADU and LCT. However,

it not used for bypass paper feed.

• MC8 ON timing

When PS20 or PS21 is ON

• MC8 OFF timing

After the specified period from when PS14 goes ON.

Paper Feed Control

DCPS1



2-94

2nd paper feed control

The paper conveyed to the 2nd paper feed section stops

after the specified period from when PS14 goes ON (loop

formation).

• MC3 ON timing

• Direct exposure scan copying

(When supefine mode is selected.)

(1st copy in either normal or fine mode withplatenmode or RADF (1-1) mode.)

After the specified period from when PS4 (paper

feed restart) goes ON

• Copying in the E-RDH mode

(2nd and subsequent copies in either normal or

fine mode with platen mode or RADF (1-1).)

(All copies in RADF (1-2, 2-1, 2-2) mode)

After the specified period from when PS18 goes

ON, or after the specified period from when MC7

(bypass paper feed) goes ON

Signals

Input signals

• PS11 (PS11 −> CB)

This is the conveyance door open/close detection

signal.

[L]: Door is closed

[H]: Door is open

• PS18 (PS18 −> CB)

When the tray, LCT, or ADU is used, the image data

from the E-RDH determines the laser write timing.

Laser write starts after the specified period from when

PS18 goes ON.

Also, during LCT or ADU paper feed, when the paper

turns PS19 (optics sync) ON, the CB checks the ON or

OFF state of PS18, and if PS18 was turned ON by the

previous sheet of paper, the CB stops the paper

momentarily at the predetermined position after PS19

ON. After the paper has passed PS18, paper feed

restarts.

[L]: Paper is detected

[H]: Paper is not detected

• PS14 (PS14 −> CB)

The paper detection signal is used for detecting the

paper feed temporary stop position.

PS14 goes ON and outputs [L] when paper is detected

at the paper feed temporary stop position.

• PS30 (PS30 −> CB)This is the jam detection sensor.

[L]: Paper is detected

[H]: Paper is not detected

• PS20/21 (PS21/21 −> CB)

This is the sensor which determines the operation

timing of MC8 (conveyance CL) (paper is conveyed as

far the 2nd paper feed section).

MC8 goes ON when PS20 or PS21 is ON.

• PS19 (PS19 −> CB)

During continuous paper feed from the LCT/ADU, the

CB checks the state of PS18 (no feed) when the paper

reaches the specified position past PS19, and if the

previous sheet of paper is still at PS18, the CB tempo-

rarily stops paper feed.

Paper feed restarts after the trailing edge of the previ-

ously fed paper has passed PS18 (no feed).

• M13 FB (M13 −> DCDB)This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed

sensor contained in M13. This signal is compared with

the M13 CLK signal input from the CB, and the differ-

ence used to control the rotational speed of M13.

Output signals



[L]: SD1 ON

[H]: SD1 OFF



[L]: SD2 ON

[H]: SD2 OFF



[L]: SD3 ON

[H]: SD3 OFF

• MC5 DRIVE (CB −> MC5)

This is the MC5 drive control signal.

[L]: MC5 ON

[H]: MC5 OFF



[L]: MC6 ON

[H]: MC6 OFF



[L]: MC7 ON

[H]: MC7 OFF



[L]: MC8 ON

[H]: MC8 OFF

• M13 DRIVE (DCDB −> M3)

This is the power supply line to M13.


This is the M13 ON/OFF control signal.[L]: M13 ON

[H]: M13 OFF

• M13 CLK (CB −> DCDB)

This is the M13 rotational speed control reference

clock signal.



2-95

MAIN BODY

Paper Up/Down Control

When a paper feed tray is inserted, M17 (upper tray) or M18

(lower tray) goes ON for a fixed period, raising the bottom plate

in the tray.

Related signals are PS16 (upper tray upper limit detection),

and PS17 (lower tray upper limit detection).

OperationON timing

M17 or M18 is turned ON by the paper size detecting

sensor.

OFF timing

M17 or M18 is turned OFF by PS16 or PS17 going ON.


• PS16 (PS16 −> CB)

This is the upper tray upper limit detection signal.

The paper in the upper tray is raised by M17, and when

it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes

[L].

• PS17 (PS17 −> CB)

This is the lower tray upper limit detection signal.

The paper in the upper tray is raised by M18, and whenit reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes

[L].

Output signals

• M17 DRIVE (CB −> M17)


[L]: M17 ON

[H]: M17 OFF

• M18 DRIVE (CB −> M18)


[L]: M18 ON[H]: M18 OFF



2-96

The size of the paper in the upper tray is detected as a result

of the matrix circuit in the CB detecting the signal from the

paper size detection board.

OperationTray (upper) paper size detection

The paper size detection board has four switches which

detect the position of the rear guide in the tray (upper). The

paper size is detected according to the particular ON-OFF

combination of these switches.

The relation between the state of the switches on the paper

size detection board and the paper size is shown below.

Paper Size Detection Control

D

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

C

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

B

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

A

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

Paper size

11x17

8.5x14

8.5x11

8.5x5.5

-

8.5x11R

8.5x5.5R


• PAPER SIZE RETURN 0 to 3 (paper size detection

board −> CB)

This is the paper size detection switch ON/OFF signal.

b. Output signals

• TEMP 1 (CB −> paper size detection board)These are the upper tray paper size detection timing

pulses.

• TEMP 2 (CB −> paper size detection board)

These are the lower tray detection timing pulses.

Tray (lower) paper size settingThe size of paper in the tray (lower) is set in the 25 mode.

(Refer to the adjustment section.)



2-97

MAIN BODY

No Paper Detection Control

No paper detection takes place by PS12 (upper tray no paper

detection), PS13 (lower tray no paper detection) and PS15

(bypass no paper detection) which are controlled by the CB.

OperationNo paper detection control

When a paper feed tray or the bypass feed tray becomes

empty, PS12, PS13 or PS15 goes ON. As a result, the

corresponding LED on operation board 1 (OB1) lights, and

a message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VFD2) con-

nected to operation board 2 (OB2).


• PS12 (PS12 −> CB)

This is the upper tray no paper detection signal.

[L]: No paper in tray

[H]: Paper in tray

• PS13 (PS13 −> CB)

This is the lower tray no paper detection signal.

[L]: No paper in tray

[H]: Paper in tray

• PS15 (PS15 −> CB)

This is the bypass feed tray no paper detection signal.[L]: No paper in tray

[H]: Paper in tray



2-98

LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition

Mechanism

Feed

1st paper feed


No paper detection

Paper size detection

Paper conveyance

Conveyance drive

*1

Method

Roller swiveling

1st paper feed roller; paper feedsolenoid, paper feed clutch

Torque limiter

Photosensor

None

Roller conveyance

Timing belt

*1: Roller swivelingTo prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper

and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being

removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops

down and touches the paper only when paper feed is takingplace.

This operation takes place as a result of the LCT paper feed

solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.

Mechanisms

Paper feed swivel plate

Upper limit detection actuator

Conveyance roller (upper)

Feed roller

LCT paper feed SD (SD141)

Paper feed roller

No paper detecting actuator

LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL1)

LCT conveyance PS (PS144)

Feed roller

LCT paper feedSD (SD141)

Paper feed roller



2-99

MAIN BODY

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1000 Tray/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Open the front door, then withdraw the LCT1000 tray/

LCT1500 tray in the forward direction.(2) Loosen the four screws, then remove the right side

upper cover.

(3) Loosen the two screws, then remove the right side

lower cover.

(4) Disconnect the two intermediate connectors (CN722,

728).

(5) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000

paper feed/conveyance section.

LCT1000 tray paper feed/ conveyance section

LCT1500 tray

CN722

CN728

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Paper feed rollerE-ring

Shaft bearing

LCT 1000 tray

(6) Reinstall the 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance sec-

tion in the opposite sequence to removal.

Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and

the Feed RollerProcedure

(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance sec-

tion.


shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the paper

feed roller unit.

(3) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, thepaper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the




E-ring

Shaft bearing

Shaft bearing


Shaft bearing


Shaft bearing

E-ring


Shaft bearing

Paint mark



on each rubber.)

E-ring

Screws



2-100

Replacing the Rubber of the Double Feed

Prevention RollerProcedure

(1) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000

paper/conveyance section.

(2) Loosen the two screws, then remove the LCT convey-

ance door.

(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft, and




Screw

LCT conveyance door


prevention roller unit. (When reinstalling the roller,

push it downward and secure it.)




on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push

down the double feed prevention roller unit.)

Paint mark

E-ring

Double feed preventionroller

Shaft


Push-downdirection

Screw

Screws Screws



2-101

MAIN BODY

1000 Tray Paper Feed/No PaperDetection Control

The 1st paper feed from the 1000 tray takes place as a result

of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper

feed) by means of CL1 (LCT 1st paper feed (1000)). The paper

feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD141 (LCT

1st paper feed (1000)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller

into contact with the paper.

M140, CL1 and SD141 are driven by the DC driver board

(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals arePS141 (LCT no paper detection (1000)), PS144 (LCT

conveyance (1000)), and PS210 (LCT pre-feed (1000)).

Operation1st paper feed operation timing

• Start of paper feed for 1st copy

Timing determined by the P counter from when the

charging corona unit goes ON

• Start of paper feed for 2nd copy

After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-

tion) goes ON during the 1st copy operation.

• OFF timing


No paper detection control

When the copy paper in the LCT1000 tray runs out, PS141

goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1

(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,

VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).


• M140 brake state signal

[H]: Brake ON

[L]: Brake OFF

• PS141 (PS141 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the no paper detection signal from the 1000

tray.[H]: No paper in tray

[L]: Paper in tray

• PS144 (PS144 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the paper passage detection signal from the

1000 tray conveyance section.

This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the


• PS210 (PS210 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the

1000 tray.

This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.

Output signals

• M140 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M140)


[H]: M140 OFF

[L]: M140 ON

• M140 PLL (CB −> DCDB −> M140)

This is the PLL control clock signal for M140.

• CL1 CONT (CB −> DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL1.

[H]: CL1 OFF

[L]: CL1 ON

• SD141 CONT (CB −> DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD141.

[H]: SD141 OFF

[L]: SD141 ON

• CL1 DRIVE (DCDB −> CL1)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL1.

[H]: CL1 OFF

[L]: CL1 ON

• SD141 CONT (DCDB −> SD141)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD141.

[H]: SD141 OFF

[L]: SD141 ON

CL1

CL1 CONT

CL1



2-102

LCT 1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition

Mechanism

Feed

1st paper feed


No paper detection

Paper size detection

Paper conveyance

Conveyance drive

*1

Method

Roller swivel

1st paper feed roller, paper feedsolenoid

Torque limiter

Photo sensor

None

Roller conveyance

Timing belt

Feed roller

Mechanisms

Horizontal conveyance rollers

Paper feed rollerLCT paper feed SD (SD140)

No paper detection actuator

Upper limit detection actuator

LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL2)

*1: Roller swivelingTo prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper

and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being

removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops

down and touches the paper only when paper feed is takingplace.

This operation is takes place as a result of the LCT paper

feed solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.

Paper feed roller

Feed roller

Paper feed swivel plateLCT paper feed SD(SD140)



MAIN BODY

2-103

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1500 Tray PaperFeed/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged


Procedure

(1) Withdraw the LCT1000 tray/LCT1500 tray in the for-

ward direction.(2) Withdraw the LCT1500 tray paper feed/conveyance

section in the forward direction, then withdraw it further

and lift it out.


shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper


LCT1500 trayconveyance section

(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance sec-

tion in the opposite sequence to removal.

Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and

Feed RollerProcedure

(1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/conveyance sec-

tion.

(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the conveyance

cover.

Conveyance cover

Feed roller

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Paper feed roller

Shaft bearing

E-ring






E-ring

Shaft bearing

E-ring

Shaft bearing


Shaft bearing


Shaft bearing

E-ring


Shaft bearing

Paint mark



on each rubber.)

Screw

Screw



2-104

Replacing the Rubber of the Double FeedPrevention Roller

Procedure

(1) Remove the LCT 1500 paper feed/conveyance sec-

tion.


prevention roller. (When reinstalling the roller unit,

push it against the rear and secure it.)

1500 Tray Paper Feed/No PaperDetection Control

The 1st paper feed from the 1500 tray takes place as a result

of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper

feed) by means of CL2 (LCT 1st paper feed (1500)). The paper

feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD140 (LCT

1st paper feed (1500)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller

into contact with the paper.

M140, CL2 and SD140 are driven by the DC driver board

(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals arePS140 (LCT no paper detection (1500)), PS146 (LCT

conveyance (1500)), and PS200 (LCT pre-feed (1500)).

Operationa. 1st paper feed operation timing

• Start of paper feed for 1st copy

Timing determined by the P counter from when the

charging corona unit goes ON

• Start of paper feed for 2nd copy

Specified period after PS14 (registration) goes ON

during the 1st copy operation

• OFF timing







Paint mark

E-ring

Double feed preventionroller

Shaft




on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push

the double feed prevention roller unit.)

Pushing direction

Screws

CL2

CL2 CONT

CL2



MAIN BODY

2-105

No paper detection control

When the copy paper in the LCT1500 tray runs out, PS140

goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1

(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,

VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).

2. Signals

a. Input signals• M140 BRAKE (M140 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the M140 brake state signal.

[H]: Brake ON

[L]: Brake OFF

• PS140 (PS140 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the no paper detection signal from the 1500

tray.

[H]: No paper in tray

[L]: Paper in tray

• PS146 (PS146 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the paper passage detection signal from the


This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the


• PS200 (PS200 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the

1500 tray.

This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.

Output signals

• M140 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M140)


[H]: M140 OFF

[L]: M140 ON

• M140 PLL (CB −> DCDB −> M140)


• CL2 CONT (CB −> DCDB)


[H]: CL2 OFF

[L]: CL2 ON


This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD140.

[H]: SD140 OFF

[L]: SD140 ON

• CL2 DRIVE (DCDB −> CL2)


[H]: CL2 OFF

[L]: CL2 ON

• SD140 CONT (DCDB −> SD140)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD140.

[H]: SD140 OFF

[L]: SD140 ON

Rev. 4/96



2-106

LCT PAPER TRAY

Composition

Mechanism

Paper lift-up

Paper lift-upCassette loading

Remaining paper indication

*1

*2

Method

Tray 1 stage

Wire driveFront loading

Index sheet

*1: Paper lift-upThe paper tray is suspended by four up/down drive wires

(wires (A) and (B) — two each).

When paper is supplied to the tray, the tray drops under the

weight of the paper, however the weight of the paper is

balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive spring.

When the paper tray is loaded, the tray motor (M402, M403)

rotates, and the wire is wound up on the drive reel, causing

the tray to rise.

When the paper tray is withdrawn from the pedestal, the

coupling between the tray and the tray drive section is

released, hence the tray falls to a position where the weight

of the paper is balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive

spring.

*2: Remaining paper indicationThe LCT can hold a large amount of paper; it has a

remaining paper indicator window to enable the user to

obtain a rough indication of the amount of paper remaining

in the tray.The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the

up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused

to slide by a tension spring.

Mechanisms

1500 tray

Remaining paper indicator window

Side guideRear stopper

Tray

Front cover

Remaining paperindicator window

Rear stopper

Tray

Side guides

1000 trayFront cover

Wire (A)

Tray motor(M141, M142)

Drive pulley

Drive pulley

Auxiliary drive pulley

Coupling gear

Auxiliary wire

Wire (B)

Tray

Wire (B)

Wire (A)

Index sheet

Remaining paperindication lever

Tray

Tension spring



MAIN BODY

2-107

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1000 TrayCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Withdraw the 1000 tray, then remove the four screws.

(2) Lift out the 1000 tray.

Removing and Reinstalling the 1500 trayCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Withdraw the 1500 tray, then remove the four screws.

(2) Lift out the 1500 tray.

(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray in the opposite sequence to

removal. In this case, however, install the front left and

right screws first.

(3) Reinstall the 1000 tray in the opposite sequence to

removal. In this case, however, install the front left and

right screws first.

1000 trayScrews

Screws

1500 tray

Screws

Screws



2-108

Replacing the WiresCaution: The method of installing the tray up/down drive

wires is the same for both the front and rear. For this

reason, the description of the method of replacing

the wires is based on the rear side only.

Install the front wires in exactly the same way as the

rear wires.

Caution:

• After replacing or reinstalling the wires, move the tray

up and down by hand, and confirm that it rises and falls

smoothly.

• Take care that wires do not cross each other or ride up

the sides of the pulleys.

• Adjust the tilt of the tray after installing the wires.

Wire (B)

Auxiliary drive spring

Auxiliary wire

Wire protection cover

Set screws

Detach the auxiliary wirefrom the auxiliary drivespring.

E-ring

Drive pulley

Wire (A)

Auxiliary wire

4 Remove the e-ring,then withdraw thedrive pulley.

Wire (A)

Wire restraining cover

Wire (B)

Wire (A)

Tray

Method of removing the wires

3 Remove therestraining covers.

1 Remove the wireprotection cover.

2

Wire (A)



MAIN BODY

2-109

Method of installing the wires

Wire (A)

Attach the wire to theauxiliary drive spring.

7

8

Pass wire (B)through the groovein the pulley, theninstall the wirerestraining cover.

2

Wire (B)

Pass wires (A)and (B) throughthe grooves inthe pulleys,then install thewire restraining

covers.

3

Wire (B)

Auxiliary wire

Wind the auxiliary wireclockwise around thedrive pulley. (1000 tray:4 turns; 1500 tray: 5 turns)

6

E-ring

Set screws

Install the wireprotection cover.

Push in the drive pulley,and secure it with the e-ring.

5

Tray

Wire adjustmentpiece

Wire (A)

Pass wires (A) and(B) at the front sideover the wireadjustment pieces.

Wire restrainingcover

Wire restraining cover

Auxiliary drivespring

Auxiliary wire

Auxiliarywire

Drive pulley

Wire (B)

Pass the wiresthrough here.

1

Wire (B)

Wire protection cover

Wire (B)

Wire (A)

Wire (A)

Wire (A)Wire (B)

Wire length343±0.4mm (1500 tray)236±0.4mm (1000 tray)

543±0.4mm (1500 tray)355±0.4mm (1000 tray)

214±0.5mm (2500 tray)157±0.5mm (1000 tray)

Wire (A)

Wire (B)

Auxiliary wire



2-110


• PS142 (PS142 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1500 tray upper limit detection signal.

This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is de-

tected.

• TRAY (15) ADD (MS141 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1500 tray loaded detection signal.This signal is the TMP4 signal which is input via MS141

when the tray is detected.

• PS143 (PS143 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1000 tray upper limit detection signal.

This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is reached.

TRAY (10) ADD (MS142 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the 1000 tray loaded detection signal.

This signal is the TM4 signal which is input via MS142

when the tray is detected.

• PS160 (PS160 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the LCT conveyance door open/close detection

signal.

[H]: LCT conveyance door open[L]: LCT conveyance door closed

Output signals



[H]: M141 OFF

[L]: M141 ON



[H]: M142 OFF

[L]: M142 ON

• TMP4 (CB −> DCDB −> MS141, MS142)

This is a pulse signal which detects the fact that the

1500 tray and the 1000 tray are loaded.


This is the M141 ON/OFF drive signal.

[H]: M141 OFF

[L]: M141 ON



[H]: M142 OFF

[L]: M142 ON

Tray Up/Down Control

The tray rises as a result of the transmission of the rotational

force of M141 (tray (1500)) and M142 (tray (1000)) by means

of the drive wires (four wires each).

M141 and M142 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)

which is controlled by the CB.

Related signals are MS141 (LCT interlock (1500)), MS142

(LCT interlock (1000)), PS142 (LCT upper limit detection

(1500)), PS143 (LCT upper limit detection (1000)), and PS160

(LCT conveyance open/close detection).

OperationWhen MS141 or MS142 detects a paper tray, M141 or

M142 goes ON, causing the corresponding tray to rise.

The tray rises until PS142 or PS143 detects the upper limit

of the paper and goes ON, then M141 or M142 goes OFF,

and the tray stops rising.

The paper is fed until PS142 or PS143 goes OFF, then

M414 or M142 goes ON once again, and the tray rises.

The lowering operation of both the 1500 tray and 1000 tray

takes place mechanically.



MAIN BODY

2-111

ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition

Mechanism

Paper path selection

Paper conveyance

*1

Method

Selector guide

Conveyance roller

*1: Selecting the paper pathThe paper that is exited from the fusing unit of the main

body is either exited from the machine or sent to the ADU

paper exit/conveyance section depending upon the setting

of the selector guide.

The selector guide operates according to the ON/OFF state

of the ADU gate solenoid (SD152).

ADU gatesolenoid (SD152)

Selector guide

Mechanisms

ADU conveyance open/close doorTiming belt

Paper exit roller

Selector guide

ADU gatesolenoid(SD152)

ADU cooling fan(M152)

Conveyanceroller



2-112

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving the ADU Paper Exit Conveyance

Section

Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Remove the cover at top left of the main body.

(2) Disconnect the two connectors (CN94, 530), then

remove the six screws, and remove the ADU paper

exit/conveyance section.

Selector Guide

The selector guide is driven by SD152 (ADU gate).

SD152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is

controlled by the CB .

Related signals are PS157 (ADU gate) and PS158 (ADU

conveyance door open/close detection).

OperationSelector guide control

When the face side copy is made, SD152 goes ON after the

specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed) goes ON,

causing the selector guide to open. As a result, the paper

exited from the fusing unit is conveyed to the ADU paper

exit/conveyance section.

SD152 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS25

(paper exit) detects the trailing edge of the paper and goes

ON, then the selector guide closes.

Paper exit/conveyance control

The paper exit roller and conveyance roller are driven by

M1 (main), and the paper exited from the fusing unit is

conveyed to the ADU paper exit/conveyance section.


• PS157 (PS157 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the signal which detects the passage of paper

through the entrance of the stacker.

This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.

View in A direction

Paper exit/

conveyancesection

A

CN94

CN530

Screws

SD 152 CONT

PS158



MAIN BODY

2-113

• PS158 (PS158 −> DCDB −> CB)

This is the signal which detects the open/closed state

of the ADU conveyance door.

[H]: ADU conveyance door open

[L]: ADU conveyance door closed

ADU DB output signals


This is the SD152 ON/OFF control signal.[H]: SD152 OFF

[L]: SD152 ON

M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control

M152 (ADU cooling fan) is installed in the paper exit/convey-

ance section in order to prevent curling of the paper.

M152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is

controlled by the CB.

OperationON timing

After the specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed)

goes ON

OFF timing

When M4 (drum) goes OFF


• M152 LD (M152 −> DC DB −> CB)


Output signals

• M152 CONT (CB −> DC DB)


[L]: M152 ON

[H]: M152 OFF

• M152 DRIVE (DC DB −> M152)


[L]: M152 ON[H]: M152 OFF



2-114

ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition

ADU paper feed motor (M151)

Mechanisms

Mechanism

Paper feed

Paper path

Paper conveyance

Conveyance drive

Jam clearance

Method

Non-stack selection

Selector gate

Conveyance roller (one)

Reversal roller (one)

Paper exit rollers (four)

Timing belts (four) + gear

Selector gate, conveyance

guide plate (B), opening/

closing of conveyance

guide plate (upper)/(lower)

*1: Non-stack paper feed mechanismThe paper in the paper exit/conveyance section is fed to the

paper feed unit by the conveyance rollers. When the

trailing edge of the paper is completely inside the paper

feed unit, it is exited to the conveyance unit by the reversalroller without being stacked. At this time, the paper is exited

from the trailing edge side; the face side and reverse

side are inverted in the conveyance unit.

ADU timing clutch (CL153)

Conveyance guide plate (lower)

Paper exit roller

Paper exit roller

Paper exit rollers

Paper exit rollers

ADU reversal clutch (CL152)

ADU paper feed clutch (CL151)

Conveyance guide plate (upper)

Conveyance roller Face side

Drum Reverse side

Reversal roller

Reversal roller (at bottom)

*1

*2

*3



MAIN BODY

2-115

*2: Paper path selectionThe selector gate switches the path of the paper exit/

conveyance between the paper advance path from the

paper exit/conveyance section to the paper feed section,

and the paper exit path from the paper feed section to the

conveyance section. The selector gate does not have a

drive mechanism. The paper path is determined by the

shape of leading edge of the gate.

• Selector gate

• Paper feed unit

• Conveyance unit

Selector gate

Conveyance guide plate (B)

Conveyance guide plate (upper)

Conveyance guide plate (lower)

During paper feed

Paper

Selector gate

During paper exit

*3: Jam clearance mechanismThere is a jam clearance mechanism on each of the

selector gate, the paper feed unit and the conveyance unit.

Jammed paper can be removed by opening and closing the

selector gate, conveyance guide plate (B) or conveyance

guide plate (upper)/(lower), depending upon where the jam

occurred.

Paper

Selector gate



2-116

Disassembly and AssemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Paper Feed/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Withdraw the ADU unit, then remove the four screws.

(2) Withdraw the ADU unit completely and lift it out.

Paper Feed/Reversal Control

The paper feed and reversal operations take place as a result

of the transmission of rotational force from M151 (ADU paper

feed) to the conveyance roller and the reversal roller by means

of CL151 (ADU paper feed) and CL152 (ADU reversal).M151, CL151 and CL152 are driven by the DC drive board

(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB.

Related signals are PS151 (ADU no paper detection), PS152

(ADU paper feed),PS153 (ADU reversal detection) and

PS157(ADU gate).

OperationPaper feed control

M151 goes ON after the specified time from when MC3

(2nd paper feed) goes ON. When PS152 detects the

leading edge of the paper conveyed from the ADU paper

exit/conveyance section and goes ON, CL151 goes ON,

causing the rotational force of M151 to be transmitted to theconveyance roller. As a result, paper is fed to the stacker

from the bottom of the selector gate. CL151 goes OFF after

the specified time from when PS152 detects the trailing

edge of the paper and goes OFF.

For the second sheet of paper, CL151 goes ON again after

the specified time from when CL152 is turned OFF by the

passage of the 1st sheet. The same operation is repeated

for the subsequent sheets as well.

ADU paper feed/ conveyance section

Screws

Screws

(2) Reinstall the paper feed/conveyance section in the

opposite sequence to removal. In this case, however,install the front left and right set screws first.



MAIN BODY

2-117

M151 goes OFF 80 ms after PS19 (optics sync) goes OFF

when the series of control operations in the ADU is com-

pleted.

Reversal control

When CL151 goes OFF, CL152 goes ON after the specified

time, and the rotational force of M151 is transmitted to the

reversal roller. As a result, the paper in the ADU paper feedsection is reversed and conveyed, then exited from the top

of the selector gate to the conveyance section. CL152 is

turned OFF after the specified time from when PS153 goes

OFF as a result of detecting the trailing edge of the paper.


• PS151 (PS151−>DCDB−>CB)

This is the no paper in stacker detection signal

[H]: Paper in stacker

[L]: No paper in stacker

• PS152 (PS152−> DCDB−>CB)

This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed/

conveyance section detection signal.



This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed

section detection signal.



This is the paper jam at border section (paper exit side)

of main body and ADU” detection signal.

[H]: Paper in stacker

[L]: No paper in stacker

• M151 LD (PS153−>DCDB−>CB)

This signal becomes [L] when M151 reaches the

specified speed.

Output signals

• M151 CONT (CB−>DCDB)


[H]: M151 OFF

[L]: M151 ON

• M151 CLOCK (CB−>DCDB−>M151)


• CL151 CONT (CB−>DCDB)


[H]: CL151 OFF

[L]: CL151 ON



[H]: CL152 OFF

[L]: CL152 ON• M151 DRIVE (DCDB−>M151)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for M151.

[H]: M151 OFF

[L]: M151 ON

• CL151 DRIVE (DCDB−>CL151)


[H]: CL151 OFF

[L]: CL151 ON



[H]: CL152 OFF

[L]: CL152 ON



2-118

Conveyance Control

Conveyance takes place as a result of the transmission of

rotational force from M151 (ADU paper feed) by means of theCL153 (ADU timing).

M151 and CL153 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)

which is controlled by the CB.

Related signals are PS154 (ADU paper exit 1), PS155 (ADU

paper exit 2) and PS156 (ADU paper exit 3).

Operation

CL153 goes ON as soon as PS19 goes ON, and conveys

the reversed and conveyed paper from the stacker to the

main body paper feed unit. CL153 goes OFF as soon as

PS18 (no feed) goes OFF.



This is the jammed paper at entrance of ADU

conveyance section detection signal.

This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.

• PS155 (PS155−> DCDB−>CB)

This is the jammed paper inside ADU conveyance

section detection signal.

This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.


This is the jammed paper at exit of ADU conveyance

section detection signal.This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.

Output signals


This is the CL153 ON/OFF control signal.

[H]: CL153 ON

[L]: CL153 ON


This is the CL153 ON/OFF drive signal.

[H]: CL153 OFF[L]: CL153 ON



MAIN BODY

2-119

ADU Mis-centering Detection Control

The mis-centering detection board (IPDB) detects the rear

edge of the paper fed from the ADU, and outputs the paperpassage position via the CB to the image processing board

(IPB). During a write operation, the IPB performs mis-centering

adjustment of the paper based on this position data.

OperationLED1 consists of a horizontal row of LEDs which light when

a paper from the ADU turns PS19 (optics synchronizing)

ON. (Invisible light because of infrared LED.) IPDB is

installed opposite LED1. The paper passage position is

detected by counting the number of LEDs 1 being blocked

off by the passage of the paper.

SignalsInput signal

• SO 0 to 6 (IPDB−>CB)

This is the paper passage position detection signal.

Output signals

• DEI 0 to 2 (CB−>IPDB)

This is the data send request signal.

• LED1 DRIVE (CB−>IPDB)

[L]: Lit

[H]: Out



2-120

CONVEYANCE SECTION

Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Paper conveyance One conveyance belt

*1: Paper conveyanceThe paper fed from the 2nd paper feed section is conveyed

to the fusing unit by the conveyance belt. The conveyance

belt is driven by the main motor. When paper is being

conveyed, it is sucked onto the conveyance belt by the

conveyance suction motor (FM14) installed beneath the

conveyance unit, in order to improve the conveyance

performance.

Conveyance unit

Conveyance belt

Corona unit release lever

*1

Conveyance roller

Fusing unit Drum unit

Conveyance belt

Conveyance guide plate

1] Composition



MAIN BODY

2-121

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Conveyance Unit

Procedure

(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit and the

fixing unit. (For the method of removing the drum unit,

refer to the sub-sections concerning the drum unit and

the fixing unit.)

(2) Detach the hook from the left side of the conveyanceguide plate, then remove the guide plate while tilting it

as shown in the figure below.

Replacing the Conveyance BeltCaution: When removing the conveyance belt, take care not

to damage it on the edge of the conveyance unit.

Procedure

(1) Remove the conveyance unit.

(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the shaft bearing

(front).

(3) Pull out the conveyance drive shaft from the convey-ance unit, then remove the conveyance belt.

Shaft bearing (front)

(4) Reinstall the conveyance unit in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Conveyance drive shaft Conveyance roller

E-ring

Conveyance belt

Hook

Conveyance guide plate

Conveyance unit

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the conveyance unit.

Screw

(4) Install the conveyance unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.



2-122

Replacing the Conveyance Suction Motor (FM14)Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-


Procedure

(1) Open the front door, then remove the upper/lower tray

and the paper feed unit.

(2) Open the CB toward you, then grasp the latch of the

connector (CN15) with radio pliers, and push it towardthe front of the main body.

FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control

Connector latch

Connector (CN15)

(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the convey-

ance suction motor.

Conveyance suctionmotor (FM14)

Screws

(4) Reinstall the suction motor in the opposite sequence

to removal.

FM14 (conveyance suction) is controlled by the CB via the DC

driver board (DCDB).Operation

FM14 is a 24 V drive DC motor. It goes ON and OFF in

synchronism with M4 (main).

SignalsInput signal

• FM14 LD (FM14−>DCDB−>CB)

This signal becomes [L] when FM14 reaches the

specified speed.

Output signals

• FM14 CONT (CB−>DCDB)

This is the FM14 ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: FM14 ON

[H]: FM14 OFF

• FM14 DRIVE (DCDB−>FM14)

This is the FM14 drive control signal.

[L]: FM14 OFF

[H]: FM14 ON



MAIN BODY

2-123

FUSING UNITComposition

Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Fusing Pressure + heat roller

Heat source Heater lamp (one upper and one lower

lamp) Cleaning Fusing cleaning roller (silicone oil)

Upper roller Aluminum + PFA coating

Lower roller Silicone rubber + PFA tube

Separation Separation claws (6 upper and 3 lower

claws)

Temperature Contact type thermistor (uses a control

detection and spare sensor)

Overheating Non-contact type thermostat

prevention 1 each for upper and lower

Neutralizing Neutralizing brush

Pressure release Pressure release cam, spring

*1: Fusing heater lampsThe fusing heater lamps consists of two halogen lamps

(one for the upper fusing roller and one for the lower fusing

roller). They are intended to reduce the warmup time from

when the machine is switched ON.

*2: Lower roller pressing and releaseWhen you move the pressure release lever in the fusing or

release direction, the pressure cam pushes the pressure

spring up or down, causing the lower roller to be pressu-

rized or released.

Lower fusing roller

Pressure release lever

Pressure spring

Pressure cam

Upper fusingroller

Fusing heaterlamp (upper)

Lower fusing rollerLower fusing claw

Paper exit roller

(lower)

Paper exitroller (upper)

Upper fusing claw

Oil application roller

Oil pad

Cleaning pad

Upper fusing cover


*1

*2

Fusing heaterlamp (lower)

Fusing cleaning roller



2-124

Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Fusing UnitCaution:

• Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged


• Do not touch the fusing unit immediately after

turning OFF the main switch because it is very hot

and you may receive a burn. Wait until the fusingunit has cooled down sufficiently before working

on it.

Procedure

(1) Open the front door, then move the pressure release

lever to the release side.

(2) Grasp the pressure release lever, then pull it output

until it locks.

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lock piece.

(4) Pull out the fusing unit further, and remove it.

Procedure

(1) Remove the fusing unit.

(2) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal

cover.

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal.

(4) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (upper) from the upper

fusing roller.

(5) Reinstall the fusing lamp (upper) in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Lamp terminal screw

Fusing heater lamp (upper)


Lock piece

(5) Reinstall the fusing unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Upper)Caution: Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (upper)

with the bare hands.

Caution:

• Install the fusing heater lamp with the makers mark

facing the drive gear side.

• When installing the fusing heater lamp, ensure that the

ends of the lamp are facing the correct direction.

• After replacing the fusing heater lamp, check to ensure

that the ends of the lamp are properly inserted in the

terminals.

Lamp terminal

Screw

Screw

Screw



MAIN BODY

2-125

Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Lower)Caution: Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (lower)

with bare hands.

Caution: When disconnecting the faston of the fusing heater

lamp, be sure to use pliers and take care not to

apply an unreasonable force.

Procedure

(1) Remove the fusing unit from the main body.(2) Remove the screw, and then remove the lamp terminal

cover.

Caution: A lock pin is inserted in the pressure release lever,

so take care not lose it.

(5) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp

(lower).

(6) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp holder.

(7) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (lower) from the lower

fusing roller.

(8) Reinstall the fusing heater lamp (lower) in the opposite


Fusing heaterlamp (lower)

ScrewFaston

Lamp holder

Faston

(3) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp

(lower).

(4) Loosen the screw, then remove the e-ring, and remove

the pressure release lever.

E-ring

Lamp terminal cover

Lock pinScrew (loosen)


Screw

Screw



2-126

Replacing the Oil PadProcedure

(1) Remove the fusing unit.

(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the upper paper exit

roller unit.

(3) Remove the four screws, then remove the upper

fusing cover.

(4) Open the oil pad to the upper side, then slide it left and

right, and remove it.

(5) Reinstall the oil pad in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Replacing the Fusing Cleaning Roller and OilApplication RollerCaution: When reinstalling the fusing cleaning roller and oil

application roller, tighten the hex screws more than

normal.

Procedure

(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing cover

and oil pad.(2) Remove the two hex screws, then pull out the shaft to the

outside, and remove the fusing impregnated roller.

(3) Loosen the four bearing casing screws ( two for front and

back side) to remove the two hex screws. Then pull the shaft

to the outside, and remove the fusing cleaning roller.

Upper paper exitroller unit

E-ringUpper fusing cover

Oil pad

Screw

Screw

Screws

Hex screws

Oil applicationroller

Hex screws

Bearing casing(back side)

Fusing cleaning roller

Bearing casing(front side)

(4) Reinstall the rollers in the opposite sequence to

removal.When reinstalling, be careful of the following items.

• The shaft must be inserted into the fusing cleaning

roller until the shaft collar reaches the roller core;

then tighten the hex screw.

• Secure the bearing casing screw after confirming

that the bearing casing reaches the flat metal edge

on the fusing roller side.

• The cleaning roller shaft holder must be positionedso that the hex screws are located at the upper limit

of the sloted holes in the shaft holder.

Revised 12/97

Push the cleaning roller shaft holders in

the direction of the arrows

Correct Incorrect

Front Rear



MAIN BODY

2-127

Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing

RollerCaution: When replacing the heat insulation sleeves, coat

the inside of the sleeves with lubricant, then fit the

sleeves onto the roller shaft.

Procedure

(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller, upper fusing

cover, oil pad, fusing heater lamp (upper), fusingcleaning roller, and oil application roller.

(2) Remove the lamp terminal cover at the rear, then

remove the c-ring, collar and gear from the upper

fusing roller.

(3) Remove the two screws at the front, then remove the

two bearing holders.

(4) Remove the bearing, then pull out the upper fusing

roller from the front.

(5) Remove the two heat insulation sleeves from the

upper fusing roller.

(6) Reinstall the upper fusing roller in the opposite se-quence to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Lower FusingRoller

Procedure

(1) Remove the fusing heater lamp (upper), fusing heater

lamp (lower) and upper fusing roller.

(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the fusing

entrance cover.

Fusing entrance cover

Screws

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance

guide plate (upper).

(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance

guide plate (lower).

Heat insulation sleeve

Heat insulation sleeve

Upper fusing roller

Bearing holder

Bearing

Upper fusing roller

Bearing holder screw

Gear

Collar

Lamp terminal cover

C-ring

Screw

Screw



2-128

Note: When installing the lower fusing roller, lower the

entrance guide plate (upper) to the bottom and

secure it. Lower the entrance guide plate (lower) to

the bottom and ensure that it is touching the fusing

bottom plate, then secure it.

(5) Remove the two screws, then remove the paper exit

plate.

Screws

Paper exit plate

(6) Raise the lower fusing roller, then remove it from the

paper exit side.

(7) Remove the two bearings from the lower fusing roller.

Entrance guide plate (upper)Screws

Screws

Fusing lower plate

Entrance guide plate (lower)

(8) Reinstall the lower fusing roller in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Lower FusingClaws

Procedure

(1) Remove the paper exit plate.

(2) Remove the three springs supporting the lower fusing

claws.

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the claw guide

plate.

(4) Remove the three lower fusing claws.

(5) Reinstall the lower fusing claws in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Bearing

Lower fusing roller

Bearing

Paper exit plate

Screw

Claw guide plate

Screw

Lower fusing claws

Springs



MAIN BODY

2-129

Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing

ClawsProcedure

(1) Open the upper paper exit roller unit.

(2) Remove the six springs attached to the upper fusing

claws.

(3) Pull out the two shafts, each of which has three upper

claws secured to it, to the outside, and remove the sixupper fusing claws.

(4) Reinstall the upper fusing claws in the opposite se-

quence to removal.

Removing and Reinstalling Fusing TemperatureSensors 1 and 2Caution:

• After reinstalling fusing temperature sensors 1

and 2, check to ensure that the sensor wires are

not touching the upper fusing roller.

• After reinstalling fusing temperature sensor 2,

check to ensure that the sensor is touching the


• Be sure to coat the screws of the sensors with

screw lock agent after reinstalling the sensors.

Removal procedure

(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing

cover, oil pad, oil application roller and entrance guide

plate (lower).

(2) Remove the two screws, then release the connector(CN98).

(3) Cut the two wiring bands, then remove pins 1 to 4 of

CN98 with tweezers.

Upper fusing claws

Upper fusing claws

(4) Remove the two screws, then remove fusing tempera-

ture sensor 1.(5) Remove the screw, then remove fusing temperature

sensor 2.

Shaft

Springs

Springs

Upper paper exitroller unit

Shaft

Wiring band

Connector (CN98)

Screw

Pin 4

Pin 3

Pin 2

Pin 1

Fusing temperature sensor 1

Fusing temperaturesensor 2

Connector(CN98)

Wiring band

Screw

Screw

Screws



2-130

Installation procedure

(1) Secure fusing temperature sensor 2 with the screw,

then place the sensor element in contact with the


(2) Set the fusing temperature sensor positioning jig be-

tween fusing temperature sensor 1 and the upper

fusing roller, then secure fusing temperature sensor 1

with two screws so that the clearance between thesensor and the upper fusing roller is within the standard

value.

Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat (Upper)Caution:

• After reinstalling the thermostat (upper), check to

ensure that the wiring is not touching the upper

fusing roller.

• Be sure to coat the screw of the thermostat (upper)

with screw lock agent after reinstalling the

thermostat.Removal procedure


cover, oil pad and fusing impregnated roller.

(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (up-

per).

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the thermostat (up-

per).

(a) Set the distance ‘a’ between the upper fusing

roller and fusing temperature sensor 1 so that it

is equal to the thickness of the fusing temperature

sensor positioning jig.

Standard: a =0.75±0.1mm (when pressure is applied)


Upper fusing roller

a

(3) Coat the screw of each sensor with screw lock agent.

(4) Insert the connector pins on the end of the cable of

each sensor to a position that corresponds to CN98.

(5) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Fastons

Thermostat (upper)

Screw


(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the upper fusing

roller) between the thermostat (upper) and the upper

fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (upper) with

the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat

(upper) and the upper fusing unit is the standard value.

Fusing temperature sensorpositioning jig


Screws



MAIN BODY

2-131

(a) Set the distance ‘a’ between the upper fusing

roller and the thermostat (upper) so that it is

equal to the thickness of thermostat positioning jig A .

(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (upper) with

screw lock agent.

(3) Connect the two fastons.

(4) Install the other parts in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat

(Lower)Caution:

• After installing the thermostat (lower), ensure that

the wiring is not touching the lower fusing roller.

• Be sure to coat the screw of the installed thermostat

(lower) with screw lock agent.

Removal procedure


cover and paper exit plate.

(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (lower).

(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lower thermostat

(lower).

Upper fusing roller

Thermostat positioning jig (for upper roller) Thermostat (upper)

Thermostat (lower)

Faston (rear)

Standard: a = 3.75 ± 0.25mm (when pressure is applied)

(b) When adjusting the above clearance, take care

that the thermostat does not ride up jig B .

Upper fusing roller

Thermostat(upper)

a

B

A

Screw

Screw



2-132


(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the lower fusing

roller) between the thermostat (lower) and the lower

fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (lower) with

the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat

(lower) and the lower fusing unit is the standard value.

(b) When adjusting the above clearance, take care

that the thermostat (lower) does not ride up jig

B .

(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (lower) with

screw lock agent.

(3) Connect the two fastons.

(4) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to

removal.

Thermostat positioning jig(for lower roller)

(a) Set the distance “b” between the lower fusing

roller and the thermostat (lower) so that it is equal

to the thickness of thermostat positioning

jig A .

Thermostat (lower)

Standard: b = 1.75 ± 0.2mm (when pressure is applied)

Lower fusing roller

b

Screw

Jig AJig B



MAIN BODY

2-133

Fusing Temperature Control

MS4

Protection against abnormality

The upper thermostat (TS1) is used to protect the machine

if the temperature of the upper fusing roller rises abnormally,

and the lower thermostat (TS2) is used to protect the

machine if the temperature of the lower fusing roller rises

abnormally.

The operating temperature of each thermostat is shown

below.TS1: Approx. 180°C

TS2: Approx. 110°C

MS4 (fusing set MS4)

The fusing heater remains energized even if the main door

is opened, however if the fusing pressure lever is moved to

the release side MS4 goes OFF and the flow of current to

the fusing heater is cut OFF.


• TH1 ANG 1, 2 (TH1−>CB)

This is the TH1 output signal.

This signal outputs a voltage that is proportional to the

surface temperature at the center of the upper fusing

roller. This signal is used for temperature control and

also for detecting an abnormally high temperature or

other abnormality.

• TH2 ANG 1, 2 (TH->CB)

This is the TH2 output signal.

This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the sur-

face temperature at the end of the upper fusing roller.

It is not directly related to temperature control but is

used for detecting an abnormality.

• PS24 (PS24−>CB)

This is the fuser detect PS signal.

[H]: Lever is up (non-operating position)

[L]: Lever is down (operating position)

Output signals

• L2 CONT (CB−>DCPS2)

This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L2.

[L]: L2 ON

[H]: L2 OFF

• L4 CONT (CB−>DCPS2)

This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L4.

[L]: L4 ON

[H]: L4 OFF

• L2 DRIVE (DCPS2−>L2)

This is the L2 AC(N) supply line.The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L2

CONT.

• L4 DRIVE (DCPS2−>L4)

This is the L4 AC(N) supply line.

The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L4

CONT.

• RL1 DRIVE (CB−>DCPS2−>RL1)

This signal controls RL1.

This signal becomes [H] if an abnormality occurs in the

machine, causing RL1 to go OFF.

The upper fusing roller is heated by fusing heater lamp 1 (L2),

and the lower fusing roller by fusing heater lamp 3 (L4). The

CB detects the temperature of the upper fusing roller by means

of the middle fusing temperature sensor (TH1), and controls L2

and L4 via DCPS2.

OperationTemperature control

• Warmup

The CB turns ON the fusing heater lamp circuit in DC

power supply unit 2 (DCPS2) as soon as the main

switch is turned ON, causing L2 and L4 to go ON until

the upper fusing roller reaches the specified

temperature. Upon completion of warmup, L4 goes

ON and OFF in synchronism with L2. If the upper

fusing roller does not reach the specified temperature

within a certain time from the start of warmup, L2, L4,

and M1 (main) remain ON until the completion of

warmup.

Set temperature = 200°C; warmup time = approx. 7 min.;

room temperature = 20°C

S. GNDPS24 L

5VDC

6-A9

6-B86-B9

CB

PS24

MODELamp

L2 L4

In copying

Warming up ON/OFFON/OFF

ON/OFF ON



2-134

OTHER KINDS OF CONTROLParts Through Which Current FlowsWhen the Main Switch is Turned OFF

OperationCurrent flows through the following parts if the power cord

is plugged into the power outlet, regardless of whether or

not SW1 (main) is ON or OFF.

Circuit breaker (CBR)

If an internal part short circuits, causing a current of more

than 8 A to flow, the breaker goes OFF, cutting off the

power to the machine.

Noise filter (NF)

The noise filter is used to reduce noise entering the ma-

chine via the power line, and also external leakage of noise

generated in the machine.

Internal heaters 1, 2 and 3 (HTR1, 2, 3)

These heaters are used to remove humidity from the paper

feed tray and the inside of the LCT.

Weekly timer (optional)) (W.T.)

This timer uses various time control functions to switch the

machine ON and OFF.

Parts That Operate When the MainSwitch is Turned ON

OperationPower supply

When SW1 (main) is turned ON, AC power is supplied to

DC power units 1, 2 and 3 (DCPS1, 2 and 3). As a result,

DCPS1 supplies DC power to the CB, DC driver board

(DCDB) and A/D converter board (ADB). The CB starts

controlling the internal circuits and also starts the following

operations.

• Initial operation of operation board (OB)

• Warmup of the fusing rollers

• Low speed operation of the various fans

DCPS2 supplies 24VDC to RL1, FS-102, and DF-306. RL1

turns ON after a certain period by a signal from the CB, then

supplies AC power to the AC-driven parts.

AC (C)



MAIN BODY

2-135

DC output voltages and corresponding symbols

SignalsOutput signal

• RL1 DRIVE (CB−>DCPS2)

This is the signal which controls RL1.

If an abnormality occurs in the main body, this signal

becomes [H], causing RL1 to go OFF.

Cooling Fan Control

FM11 (polygon cooling fan), FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan), FM16

(main body cooling fan) and FM2 (optics cooling fan) are

driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is controlled by

the CB.

OperationA 24 V DC motor is used for each cooling fan.

Operation of FM11

During idling: low speed rotation

During a copy operation: High speed rotation

Operation of FM22


During a copy operation: High speed rotationOperation of FM16


During a copy operation: High speed rotation

Operation of FM2

ON only during a copy operation.



This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM2.

[L]: FM2 ON

[H]: FM2 OFF



2-136


This is the rotational speed control signal for FM11.

[L]: Low speed rotation

[H]: High speed rotation


This is the FM22 rotational speed control signal.


[H]: High speed rotation• FM16 CONT (CB−>DCDB)

This is the rotational speed control signal for FM16.


[H]: High speed rotation

• FM11 H/L (DCDB−>FM11)

This is the rotation drive signal for FM11.

[L]: High speed drive

[H]: Low speed drive









• FM2 DRIVE (DCDB−>FM2)

This is the drive control signal for FM2.

[L]: FM2 OFF

[H]: FM2 ON

Input signal


This signal becomes [L] when FM11 reaches the set

speed.



speed.

• FM22 LD (FM22−>DCDB−>CB)This signal becomes [L] when FM22 reaches the set

speed.



speed.



MAIN BODY

2-137

Operation Panel Control

The operation panel consists of three operation boards which

comprise the following three circuits.

• LED drive circuit

• LCD display circuit

• Input circuit for the various buttons

OperationLED drive operation

The various LEDs are turned ON and OFF by ICs (shift

register/latch driver).

Each IC turns ON/OFF the LED connected each output

terminal, according to serial data from the control board

(CB).

LCD display operation

The LCD (VFD1, VFD2) on operation board 2 (OB2)

displays various messages according to the LCD control

signal (serial data) output from the CB.

Various kind input operations

A matrix circuit is used for processing key inputs from the

operation panel. In this circuit, there are 12 key return

terminals for four timing pulses output from the CB, and a

total of 48 key inputs are output to the CB.



2-138

Indication and state after the initial operation

Function Initial state

Start print button Lit green (ready state)

Copy quantity 01

ADF Flashing (auto priority mode) *

AES Lit (auto priority mode) *

APS Lit (auto priority mode) *

1:1 Lit

Magnification Fixed

Paper size The LEDs corresponding to all of

the set paper sizes are lit.

Caution: Items marked * can be selected in the 25 mode.

Initial operation of the operation panel

When the machine is in one of the following states, the

various set conditions are in the initial conditions.

• When the power is switched ON (SW1 OFF−>ON)

• When the auto reset operates

• When the auto shutoff is canceled

• When the auto button is pressed

• When the key counter of a machine that uses a key

counter is inserted

• When originals are placed in the ADF in the non-ADF

mode

• When the bypass feed tray is returned in the bypass

feed mode

KEY

RTN O

KEY

RTN 1

KEY

RTN 2

KEY

RTN 3

KEY

RTN 4

KEY

RTN 5

KEY

RTN 6

KEY

RTN 7

KEY

RTN C

KEY

RTN D

KEY

RTN E

KEY

RTN F

KEY

SEL 0

SW001

“1”

SW009

“5”

SW005

“9”

SW013,014

“Copy”

SW004

“Enlarge”

SW005

“Reduce”

SW013

“2 IN 1/4 IN 1”

SW001

“Copy Mode”

SW009

“F2”

SW014

“Image Read”

SW012

“Memory”

SW014

“Timer Setting”

KEY

SEL 1

SW015

“2”

SW010

“6”

SW006

“0”

SW002

“Interrupt”

SW007

“Magnification”

SW015

“Spare”

SW013

“Text/Photo”

SW018

“Preheat”

SW008

“Set F1”

SW006

“Independent Magnification Change”

SW009

“Repeat”

SW011

“Intersheet”

KEY

SEL 2

SW016

“3”

SW011

“7”

SW007

“P”

SW003

“Auto Reset”

SW002

“Copy Density Ð”

SW007

“Reduction Shift/Shift”

SW015

“Book Copy”

SW004

“Thick Paper/Thin Paper”

SW010

“F3”

SW013

“Single Step”

SW010

“Reversed black and white mode”

SW008

“OHP intersheet”

KEY

SEL 3

SW017

“4”

SW008

“8”

SW012

“Stop/Clear”

SW004

“Super Size”

SW003

“Copy Density ”

SW021

“Output”

SW006

“erasure outside original area”

SW003

“Memory”

SW011

“F4”

SW012

“Insertion Page/Chapter Demarcation”

SW005

“Fold erasure/frame erasure”

SW001

“Timer Cancel”

: OB1, : OB2, : OB3,



MAIN BODY

2-139

Counter Control

This machine contains the following counters.

Total counter (C(T))

Key counter (C(K))

These counters are controlled by the CB.

PS25 (paper exit detection) is a signal related to this

control.

OperationThis machine counts copies by means of two software

counters.

• Paper feed counter

The count increases by 1 each time the 1st paper feed

goes ON.

• Paper exit counterThe count increases by 1 each time PS25 goes ON

OFF.

Operation of each counter

Copy quantity display counter on OB

Normal Paper jam

Indicates the count on the ndicates the count on

paper feed counter. I the paper exit counter.

C(K)

This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit

counter.

C(T)This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit

counter.


KEY RTN 0 to F (OB1−>CB)

This is the signal returned from the button signal input

section.

Output signals

• KEY SEL 0 to 3 (CB−>OB1)

These are the timing pulses to the button signal inputsection.

• OB DATA (CB−>OB1)

This is the LED display data.

• OB CLOCK (CB−>OB1)

This is the clock signal used to read OB DATA. Data

is read in synchronism with this signal.

• OB LATCH (CB−>OB1)

This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes

[L], the read data is displayed on the LED.

• LCD1 SIG (CB−>OB2)

This is the VFD1 ON/OFF control signal.

When this signal is [L], VFD1 is ON.

• LCD1 DATA (CB−>OB2)This is the VFD1 display data.

• LCD1 CLOCK (CB−>OB2)

This is the clock signal for reading LCD1 DATA. Data

is read in synchronism with this signal.

• LCD1 LATCH (CB−>OB2)

This is the data latch signal. When this signal is [L], the

read data is displayed on VFD1.

• LCD2 SIG (CB−>OB2)

This is the VFD2 ON/OFF control signal.

When this signal is [L], VVFD1 is ON.

• LCD2 DATA (CB−>OB2)

This is the VFD2 display data.

• LCD2 CLOCK (CB−>OB2)

This is the clock signal for reading LCD2 DATA.

Data is read in synchronism with this signal.

• LCD2 LATCH (CB−>OB2)

This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes

[L], the read data is displayed on VFD2.



2-140


• C(K) JOINT (C(K)−>CB)

This signal informs the CB that the count on C(K) has

increased.

• PS25 (PS25−>CB)

This is the PS25 state signal.

When this signal is [L], PS25 goes ON, indicating thatthe paper has been exited.

Output signals

• C(T) DRIVE (CB−>C(T))

This is the C(T) drive signal.

When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of

C(T) increases by 1.

• C(K) DRIVE (CB−>C(K))

This is the C(K) drive signal.

When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of

C(K) increases by 1.

Option Control

In this machine, the weekly timer and memory card options are

controlled by the CB.

OperationThe weekly timer, memory card, and FNS contain a CPU

which controls the flow of data with the main body CB.

(Refer to the option manual for details of each option.)

Power is supplied to the FNS by DCPS2 (DC power supply

unit). The weeklt timer has its own power supply and power

is supplied to the memory card via the CB.

(FS-103)



MAIN BODY

2-141

Operation/output timing of coin vender signal

Pin No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Signal name

Vender copy

Vender copy

Paper size

0 to 3

Vender two-

sided copy

N.C.

N.C.

P.GND

Output timing

Output from when the copy button is pressed

until the copy is exited.

100 ms L signal that is synchronized with the

main body tray/LCD

Output only while a copy is being made.

Signal output only while a copy is being

made.

—

—

—

Kind of signal

Open collector 35 V, 200 mA




—

—

—

Description

Copy in progress

signal

Paper feed signal

Paper size signal

Two-sided copy

select signal

Spare terminal

Spare terminal

Power ground



2-142




3-1





3-3





3-5





3-7





3-9





4-1





JAM LIST

5-1

JAM LISTThis section contains paper jam operating conditions.

Paper Jam

Jam

codeMethod of clearing jam

A copy is made, a jamoccurs, and the copier

stops after the copy

exits.

Remove the original pa-per from bypass tray then

remove the jammed pa-

per.

Open the main body con-

veyance door and remove

the jammed paper, then

close it.

Open the tray and remove


close it.

Open the LCT conveyancedoor and remove the

jammed paper, if any, and

close it.

Open the tray and remove

the jammed paper, if any,

and close it.

J10-2

J10-4

J11-1

J11-2

J11-3

J11-4

J12-1

J12-2

J12-3

J12-4

J13-1

J13-2

J13-3

J14-1

J14-2

J14-3

Classifica-

tion

M a i n b

o d y a n d L C T

PS14 (register) is not turned ONwithin 2 seconds from ON of SD3

(bypass feed).

PS30 (bypass) is ON at the time of

ON of SD3 (bypass feed).

PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON dur-

ing idling.

PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is not turned

ON within 400 msec from ON of an

SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).

PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON

within 650 msec from ON of an SD1

(1st paper feed (upper)).

PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON for

ON of SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).

PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON dur-

ing idling.

PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is not turned

ON within 400 msec from ON of SD2

(1st paper feed (lower)).

PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON

within 820 msec from ON of SD2

(1st paper feed (lower)).

PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON for

ON of SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)).

PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) is ONduring idling.

PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) not

turned ON within 420 msec from ON

of SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)).

PS144 (LCT conveyance (1000)) is

not turned ON within 2 seconds from

ON of SD141 (LCT paper feed

(1000)).

PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is ON

during idling.

PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is not


of SD140 (LCT paper feed (1500)).PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) is

not turned ON within 2.4 seconds

from ON of SD140 (LCT paper feed

(1500)).

CausesOperation when jam

occurs

Whenoperating

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

Whenstationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

Main bodypaper feed

jam

LCTpaper feed

jam



5-2

The main body is

stopped immediately.

A copy is made, a jam

occurs, and the copier

stops after the copy

exits.

The main body is


PS14 (register) is ON during idling.

PS14 (register) is not turned OFF

within 1300 msec from completion

of exposure.PS18 (no feed) or PS19 (optics sync)

is ON during idling.

PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON

within 280 msec from start of copy-

ing.

PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON

within 560 msec from ON of PS157

(ADU gate).

PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON

within 430 msec from the start of

reconveyance in right lengthwise

transport in LCT paper feed.

PS18 (no feed) is not turned ONwithin 390 msec from the start of

reconveyance in right lengthwise

transport in LCT/ADU reverse side.

A loop is not completed within 400

msec from ON of a PS18 (no feed).

PS146 (LCT pass detection) or

PS144 (LCT feed) is ON during idling.

PS146 (LCT pass detection) has

not turned ON within 300ms after

the 1st feeder of LCT1 was ON.

PS144 (LCT feed) has not turned

ON within 440ms after 1st feeder of

LCT2 was ON.Drum jam sensor is ON.

PS14 (register) is not turned OFF

within paper size length + 20 mm

from ON of MC3 (2nd paper feed).

PS14 (register) is not ON when MC3

(2nd paper feed) is ON.

PS25 (paper exit) is not turned ON

within 2000 msec from ON of MC3

(2nd paper feed).

PS25 (paper exit) was turned ON

within 280 msec from copy start.

PS25 (paper exit) is ON during idling.

PS25 (paper exit) is not turned OFF/

ON within 2000 msec from comple-

tion of exposure.

Jam


Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation when jam

occurs

Open the front door and

remove the jammed pa-

per, then close it.

Open the conveyance

door and remove the

jammed paper, then close

it.

Open the front door and

remove the jammed

paper, then close it.

Open the paper exit and

the front door and remove


close them.

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

J16

J17-1

J17-2

J17-3

J17-4

J17-5

J17-6

J19

J21

J30-1

J30-2

J31

J32

Conveyance

jam

Revised 3/99

M a i n b o d y a n d L C T



JAM LIST

5-3

F S - 1 0 3

ADF was opened during ADF

operation.

PS304 (original passage) is ON dur-

ing idling in ADF mode.

PS304 (original passage) is notturned ON within a certain period

from the start of ADF original.

PS304 (original passage) is not

turned OFF within a certain period

from its ON.

PS304 (original passage) ON when

original setting is completed.

PS305 (original exit) is ON during

idling in ADF mode.

PS305 (original exit) is not turned

ON within a certain period from the

start of ADF original exit.

PS305 (original exit) is not turnedOFF within a certain period from its

ON.

PS305 (original exit) is not turned

ON within a certain period from the

start of RADF original reversing.

PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806

(paper pass 2) are ON during idling.

During operation, the front cover

was opened or a finisher was sepa-

rated from the main body.

PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806

(paper pass 2) are not turned ON

within a certain period from ON of

PS25 (paper exit).

In finisher, paper conveyance was

not carried out properly.

Papers having different widthwise

sizes were delivered on a staple

tray.

Stapler did not operate correctly.

PS4 (FIN entrance passage)

detected paper.

PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)

detected paper.PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and


detected paper.

PS6 (paper exit 1) detected paper.

PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and



and PS6 (paper exit 1) detected

paper.

J61

J62

J63

J72

J74

J75

J72-01

J72-02

J72-03

J72-04

J72-05

J72-06

ADF

paper exit

jam

FNS

conveyance

jam

FNS

paper exit

jam

FNS

stapler jam

FS-103

Jam


ADF is stopped imme-

diately.

When there is paper in

or after transfer, the

main body stops afterpaper exit.

Finisher/main body is


FS-103/main body is


Open ADF and remove the


it.

If there is jammed paper

on a conveyance unit inthe main body, remove it.

If there is a jammed paper

in finisher/main body, re-

move it.

Open finisher and remove

jammed paper, then

close it.

Remove jammed staple

from a stapler unit.

Remove the jammed

paper from the finisher/

main body.

Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation when jam

occurs

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

When

stationary

Whenoperating

A D F

F S - 1 0 2

Revised 3/99



5-4

J72-07

J72-08

J72-09

J72-0A

J72-0B

J72-0C

J72-0D

J72-0E

J72-0F

J72-10

J72-11

J72-12

J72-13

J72-14

J72-15

J72-16

J72-17

Jam


Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation when jam

occurs

When

stationary

FS-103/main body are


Remove the jammed


main body.

PS4 (FIN entrance passage), PS5

(stacker conveyance passage), and


PS1 (printer paper exit) is ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS4(stacker conveyance passage) are

ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS5

(stacker conveyance passage) are

ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5 (stacker

conveyance passage), and PS4 (FIN

entrance passage) are ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS6

(paper exit 1) are ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit), PS4 (FIN

entrance passage), and PS6 (paper

exit 1) are ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5


PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.

PS1 (printer paper exit), PS6 (paper

exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance

passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance

passage) are ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0) is ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS4

(FIN entrance passage) are ON.


(stacker conveyance passage) are

ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5 (stacker





PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS4 (FIN

entrance passage), and PS6 (paper

exit 1) are ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5


PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS6 (paperexit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance

passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance

passage) are ON.

Note: For several of the jam conditions listed in this section, the jam codes for FS-103A equipped machines differ from those

of FS-103 equipped machines. For example, if both finishers are experiencing the same exact jam condition, such as: PS4

(FIN entrance passing) is not turned ON after the copy is conveyed throught the main body paper exit photosensor, code

“J72-41” would appear on FS-103A equipped machines – however, code “J72-21” would appear on FS-103 equipped

machines. This service manual provides FS-103 codes only. For this reason, a table has been included at the end of this

paper jam section which provides cross-reference information to determine the corresponding FS-103 jam codes for

FS-103A equipped machines.

Revised 3/99

FS-103

F S - 1 0 3



JAM LIST

5-5


(printer paper exit) are ON.

PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer

paper exit), and PS4 (FIN entrance

passage) are ON.PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer

paper exit), and PS5 (stacker

conveyance passage) are ON.


paper exit), PS5 (stacker




paper exit) and PS6 (paper exit 1 )

are ON.


paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance

passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)

are ON.


paper exit), PS5 (stacker

conveyance passage), and PS6



paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance

passage), PS5 (stacker conveyance

passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)

are ON.

PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does

not turn ON after paper goes past

main body paper exit PS.

PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON

after paper goes past PS4 (FIN

entrance passage) (only in offset

mode).


does not turn ON after paper goes

past PS4 (FIN entrance passage).


does not turn OFF within a certain

period from when it turned ON.

PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON

within a certain period from whenM7 (paper exit roller) turned ON. (In

staple mode only.)


not turn OFF within a certain period

from when it turned ON.

After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)

turns ON, it does not turn OFF. (Sub-

tray exiting only.)

After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)

turns ON/OFF, PS12 (paper exit)

does not turn ON/OFF.

J72-18

J72-19

J72-1A

J72-1B

J72-1C

J72-1D

J72-1E

J72-1F

J72-21

J72-22

J72-23

J72-24

J72-26

J72-27

J72-28

J72-29

F S - 1 0 3

Jam


Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation when jam

occurs



Remove the jammed


main body.

When

stationary

When

operating

Revised 3/99

FS-103



5-6

PS17 (stapler F HP) does not turn

ON within a certain period from

when M10 (stapler F) turned ON.

PS15 (stapler R HP) does not

turn ON within a certain periodfrom when M9 (stapler R) turned

ON.

PS15 (stapler R HP) and PS17

(stapler F HP) do not turn ON

within a certain period from when

M9 (stapler R) and M10 (stapler

F) turned ON.


not turn ON after paper goes past

main body paper exit PS

PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn

ON after paper goes past PS4

(FIN entrance passage) (Only inoffset mode.)

PS5 (stacker conveyance

passage) does not turn ON after

paper goes past PS4 (FIN

entrance passage).

PS5 (stacker conveyance

passage) does not turn OFF

within a certain period from when

it turned ON.


ON within a certain period from

when M7 (paper exit roller)

turned ON.


OFF within a certain period from

when it turned ON.

PS4 (FIN entrance passage)

does not turn OFF within a certain

period from when it turned ON.

PS152 (ADU paper feed) is not

turned ON within 2000 msec from

ON of PS25 (paper exit).

During idling, PS152 (ADU paper

feed), PS153 (ADU reversal) or

PS157 (ADU gate) is ON.PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON

within 280 msec from the copy start.

CL151 (ADU paper feed) is not

turned OFF within 1500 msec from

ON of PS152 (ADU paper feed).

PS154 (ADU paper exit 1) is not

turned ON within 640 msec from

OFF of PS152 (ADU paper feed).

PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) is not


of PS154 (ADU paper exit 1).

Jam


Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation when jam

occurs

F S - 1 0 3



Remove the jammed


main body.

J72-31

J72-32

J72-33

J72-41

J72-42

J72-43

J72-44

J72-45

J72-46

J72-47

When

operating

A D U

ADU

paper feed

jam

ADU

paper exit

jam

J92

J93

J94

When

operating

When

stationary

When

operating

The main body is


Open ADU/main body

front door/lengthwise

conveyance door and

remove jammed paper,

then close it.

Revised 3/99

FS-103



JAM LIST

5-7

Jam


The main body is


Open ADU/main body

front door/lengthwise con-

veyance door and remove


it.

J95

J96

Classifica-

tion

A

D U

During idling, PS154 (ADU paper

exit 1), PS155 (ADU paper exit 2),

PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) or PS151

(ADU no paper) is ON.

PS153 (ADU reversal) is OFF after

140 msec from OFF of PS152 (ADU

paper feed).

CausesOperation when jam

occurs

When

stationary

When

operating

ADU

paper exit

jam

FS-103/FS-103A Paper Jam Code Cross-Reference TableFor FS-103A equipped machines, refer to this table to determine the corresponding FS-103 code for those FS103A codes listed below

If this FS-103A code is displayed:

J72-41

J72-42

J72-43

J72-44

J72-46

J72-47

J72-48

J72-49

The corresponding FS-103 code is:

J72-21

J72-22

J72-23

J72-24

J72-26

J72-27

J72-28

J72-29

Revised 3/99



5-8

Warning

Machine warnings appear as flashing jam codes (3 digits) on the magnification display LED..

CausesOperation in case of warning

Releasing method

Paper feed

door (upper)open

Paper feed

door (lower)

open

Paper exit

door open

Front door

open

Key counter

not mounted

L detection

connector

coming off

Electronic

RDH

memory

overflow

ADU open

Tray 3 over

loading of

transfer

papers

Tray 4 over

loading of

transfer

papers

Paper feed door (upper) of the main body

was opened.

Paper feed door (lower) of the main body

was opened.

Paper feed door was opened.

Front door was opened.

When a key counter is not mounted on a

machine to be equipped with the key

counter.

When L detection output does not vary

after a certain period from the start of copy

operation.

In the case of overflow of memory in a

mode of using E-RDH.

When ADU is drawn out.

When tray 3 is mounted, upper limit

detection sensor is ON (overloading) from

the beginning.

When tray 4 is mounted, upper limit

detection sensor is ON (overloading) from

the beginning.

The main body is stopped

immediately if it is in the copyprocess.

When a key counter is drawn

out during book copying, paper

in copying stops at paper exit.

However, when a key counter

instant cut mode is selected,the main body is stopped

immediately.

Before the start of copying, a

warning appears. After the start

of copying, the main body stops

after ejecting all papers, and a

warning is displayed.

In the case of collective reading,

a warning appears and MSG

functions are conducted. When

ADF is used, an original is

ejected when the machine

stops.

In the case of real time output, a

warning appears and MSG

functions are conducted after

completion of partial output.


immediately if it is in process of

copying.

Only in idling, "draw out tray 3”

and “remove paper” are

displayed on detection MSG.

Close paper feed door

(upper).

Close paper feed door

(lower).

Close paper exit door.

Close front door.

Mount a key counter.

Reset to initial set state.

In the case of instant cut

mode, remove jammed

paper.

Insert connector after

turning main switch OFF,

then turn it ON.

Change the number of

originals and read again.

Set ADU.

Pull out corresponding

tray, or reduce the number

of papers.

P17

P19

P33

P51

P81

P27

P45

Classifica-

tion

Warning

code

P91

M a i n b o d y

P13

P14



JAM LIST

5-9

Classifica-

tionCauses

Operation in case of warningReleasing method

A D F

P61

P64

P68

F i n i s h e r

Warning

code

Reversal

enclosure

open

Leaving an

original

*1

Drawing out

of original

*1

No feed

Paper

remaining

on tray

No staple in

stapler

Stapler unit

not mounted

Reversal enclosure of RADF was opened

during idling.

After non-ADF copying, ADF mode was

selected without removing original byopening/closing ADF.

Original was drawn out during book copy-

ing.

Original no feed was caused in ADF mode.

During idling or copying, tray paper detec-

tion or staple tray detection detected pa-

per.

Staples in a staple cartridge were used

up.

Stapler unit is not mounted.

–

–

The main body detects that job

set has been completed, and

ADF and the main body stop

after the copy sets are finished,

and then a warning is displayed.

The main body detects no

original feed, and ADF and the

main body stop after the copies

are finished, and then a warning

is displayed.

After receiving from finisher the

signal showing excessive

sheets loading, a warning is

displayed at a pause in the copy

sets.

In staple mode, copying is

continued until the number of

sheets to be stapled is reached.

–

Close reversal enclosure.

Remove original by

opening and closing ADF.

Set original after drawing

it once.

Recovery is not

conducted.

Set original after drawing

it once.

Conduct JOB recovery

operation. (Remaining

paper process is

necessary when papers

remain in the main bodyduring book copying.)

Remove paper from tray.

(Continue remaining

output operation with copy

ON.)

Load a new staple

cartridge.

Set a stapler unit.

*1: During copy operation, when an ADF original is removed or inserted, P68 or P69 occurs, depending on timing. When thishappens the recovery method is different.

P69

P74

P76

P78



5-10

Classifica-tion

CausesOperation in case of

warning


immediately if it is in copy

process, and main relayis turned OFF.

Main relay is turned OFF

and all keys are not

accepted.



process, main relay is

turned OFF, and all keys

are not accepted.

Main relay is turned OFF,


accepted.

Releasing

method

Main switch

OFFà ON

Main switch

OFFà ON

R e m o v e

jammed paper.

Change a key

word at address

of P47 to 0 in 25

mode.

PS16 (upper limit (upper)) is not

turned ON within 7.5 seconds from

ON of M17 (upper try).PS17 (upper limit (lower)) is not

turned ON within 7.5 seconds from

ON of M18 (lower try).

PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000)) is


from ON of M142 (LCT try (1000)).

PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500)) is


from ON of M141 (LCT try (1500)).

Operation for charging corona

wire cleaning was tried, but

either it was locked, or it waslocked half way.

Operation for transfer and sepa-

ration corona wire cleaning was

tried, but either it was locked,

or it was locked half way.

When charging output is read

as an abnormal discharge.

When transfer output is read


When separation output is read


Fusing temperature is exceed-

ing approx. 220°C. (Fusing high

temperature detection circuit

operates.)

Fusing temperature is exceed-

ing approx. 220°C. (Fusing high

temperature detection circuit

operates.)

Warmup is not completed

within a certain period from the

start of the warmup. (Fusing

low temperature trouble detec-

tion software operates.)

After completion of warmup,fusing temperature is lower

than a prescribed temperature.

(Fusing low temp. trouble

detection software operates.)

Estimated defective parts

F22-2

F28-1

F22-1

CB (control board)

M17 (upper try)

PS16 (upper limit (upper))CB (control board)

M18 (lower try)

PS17 (upper limit (lower))

CB (control board)

M142 (LCT try (1000))

PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000))

CB (control board)

M141 (LCT try (1500))

PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500))


DCDB (DC driver board)

Transfer/separation unit

DCDB (DC driver board)


HV1 (high voltage unit 1)

Transfer unit


Separation unit


TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)




L2 (fusing heater lamp (upper))

L4 (fusing heater lamp (lower))

Fusing unit insertion failure

Paper feed

lifting

trouble

Wire

cleaning

trouble

High voltage

power

source

trouble

Fusing high

temperature

trouble

Fusing low

temperature

trouble

F28-2

F28-3

Warning

code

F18-4

(15)

F18-3

(10)

F18-2

(lower)

F18-1

(upper)

M a i n b o d y

Trouble

F34-1

F34-2

F35-1

F35-2



JAM LIST

5-11

M a i n b o d y

Classifica-

tionCauses

Change a key

word at address

of P47 to 0 in 25

mode.

Main switch

OFFà ON

R e m o v e

jammed paper.

Set original

glass, and OFF

à ON of main

switch .

OFF of main

switchà ON

Remove

jammed paper,

if any.

CB (control board)



Fusing unit insertion failure

OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)

PS3 (shading position)

PS4 (paper feed restart)

PS5 (optics return)

PS7 (optics timing)

Exposure unit

OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)

CB brake data

PS8 (glass)

Original glass mounting

failure

CB (control board)

DCPS2 (DC power supply unit 2)

L1 (exposure lamp)

Exposure temperature fuse

F36-1 Main relay is turned OFF,

and all keys are not ac-

cepted.


immediately, the main

relay is turned OFF, and

all keys are not accepted.



process, the main relay is

turned OFF, and all keys

are not accepted.

A prescribed temperature is not

reached within 40 seconds from

the start of warmup. (Fusing

sensor snapping detection soft-

ware operates.)A prescribed temperature is not

reached within 40 seconds from

the start of warmup. (Fusing

sensor snapping detection cir-

cuit operates.)

Each PS in optics is not turned ON

within 5 seconds from the start of

optics returning in initial search.

(PS3 (shading position),PS4 (pa-

per feed restart),PS5 (optics

return),PS7 (optics timing))

Home position sensor is not

turned ON when optics stops inoptics return.

Optics return signal is not turned

ON within 120 msec from start

of brake when optics return.

Original glass detection is OFF.

PS8 (glass) is OFF.

During copying, FB signal of

L1 (exposure lamp is ON or is

snapped) is ON for 20 seconds

or more.

Software detects that FB signal

of L1 (output when exposure

lamp is ON or is snapped) is

not turned ON 1 second after

the outputting of L1 lighting sig-

nals.

FB signal of L1 is ON for 45

seconds in a self-diagnostic

mode and for 21 seconds in all

other cases.

FB signal of L1 (output when

exposure lamp is ON or is

snapped) is ON for 21 seconds

or more during idling.

Snapping

of fusing

sensor

Optics re-

turning trou-

ble

Glass open

trouble

CVR trouble

F36-2

F41-1

Estimated defective partsWarning

code

Releasing

method

Operation in case of

warning

F41-3

F41-4

F43-1

F43-2

F43-3

F43-4

F41-2



5-12

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON. If there is

jamming paper,

remove it.

E46-0

E46-1

E46-2

E46-6

E46-8

E46-9

E47-0

E47-1

E47-2

E48

F49-0

F49-1

F49-2

F49-3

F49-4

F49-5


warning

Releasing

method

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON. If there is

jamming paper,

remove it.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON. If there is

jamming paper,

remove it.

During APC, when LDB1 (la-

ser diode board 1) or LDB2

(laser diode board 2) sensed

an error.

(Not used).

An error of the FIFO of the E-

RDH.

An error of the extension of the

E-RDH.

An error in the INDEXSB (in-

dex sensor board).

When no change is observed

in outputting the NDEXSB in

executing the APS.

Compression IC error.

When DTACK is not returnedfrom the compression IC.

Communication is not returned

from the CPU of the IPB (image

processing board).

Paper arrived at the 2nd paper

feed position too early.

AD board. During shooting.

Auto gain control.

A sub-scanning beam correc-

tion error occurs when a

complete command is not

returned within 10 seconds.

The E- RDH is not connected.

ADB (AD conversion board) is

not connected.

The laser driver board/1 is not

connected.

The laser driver board/2 is not

connected.

The index-sensing board is notconnected.

The sub-scanning correction

board is not connected.

Classifica-

tionEstimated defective parts

Warning

code

M a i n b o d y

Image

processing

error

Image

processing

CPU error

Sub -scan -

ning

beam correc-

tion error

Image

processing

connection

error

During copying the main

body is stopped

immediately. The main

relay is turned OFF and


During idling the pro-

cess is immediately

interrupted.

During copying the

process is immediately

interrupted.

May occur only when

AGC is carried out during

idling.

During idling the pro-

cess is immediately

interrupted.

When the power supply is

charged, it is sensed. The

main relay is turned OFF


accepted.

IPB (image processing board)

LDB1 (laser diode board 1)


Laser interlock

E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)


INDEXSB (index sensor board)

PB (image processing board)



Laser interlock




Bundle

MC8 (conveyance), IPB

(image processing board)

IPB (image processing

board, ADB (A/D board)




M40 (laser revise)


ADB (AD conversion board)



INDEXSB (index sensor board)

M40 (laser revise)



JAM LIST

5-13


warning

Releasing

method

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON.

Turn the main

switch from

OFF to ON. If

there is jam-

ming paper,

remove it.

Estimated defective partsClassifica-

tion

Warning

code

M a i n b o d y

Motor speed

abnormality

Fan lock

abnormality

ADF

abnormality



relay is turned OFF and


During copying, after all

papers exit, the main body

stops, and all keys are not

accepted.

The main body is stoppedimmediately during

shading correction and all

keys are not accepted.

After set JOBs are com-

pleted, the warnings are

displayed.

The main body and the

ADF are stopped imme-

diately. The main relay is

turned OFF and all keys

are not accepted.

The ADF is stopped im-

mediately. With regard to

the main body, after com-pleting copying, the main

relay is turned OFF.

Speed error in M35

(developing screw).

Speed error in M1 (main).

Speed error in M10 (tonersupply).

Speed error in M3 (developing

drive).

Speed error in M4 (drum).

Speed error in M5 (polygon).

Speed error in M151 (ADU

paper feed).

Speed error in M140 (LCT

paper feed).

Speed error in M12 (opticsdrive).

Locking error in FM16 (main

body cooling fan).

Locking error in FM14 (conveyance

suction fan).

Locking error in FM30 (developing

suction fan).

Locking error in FM2 (optics

cooling fan).

Locking error in FM15 (E-RDH

cooling fan).

Locking error in FM11 (polygon

cooling fan).

Locking error in M152 (ADU

fan).

Communication between the

main body CB and the ADF is

discontinued for a certain time.

During the ADF working, a sig-

nal from PS307 (ADF encoder)

is not sent in a certain time.

A D F

F51-1

F51-2

F51-3

F51-4

F51-5

F51-6

F51-7

F51-8

F51-9

F52-1

F52-2

F52-3

F52-4

F52-5

F52-6

F52-7

E60

E67

M35 (developing screw)

DCDB (DC drive board)

M1 (main)


M10 (toner supply)DCDB (DC drive board)

M3 (developing drive)


M4 (drum)


M5 (polygon)

PBDB (polygon drive board)


M151 (ADU paper feed)


M140 (LCT paper feed)


M12 (optics drive)OPMDB (optical drive motor drive board)

FM16 (main body cooling fan)

FM14 (conveyance suction fan)

FM30 (developing suction fan)

FM2 (optics cooling fan)

FM15 (E-RDH cooling fan)

FM11 (polygon cooling fan)

M152 (ADU fan)

CB (control board)

ADF CB (ADF control board)

ADF CB (ADF control board)

M301 (ADF drive)



5-14


warning

Releasing

methodEstimated defective parts

Classifica-

tion

Warning

code

F S - 1 0 2

Communication error

M801 (conveyance) error

M802 (1st exiting) error

M803 (2nd exiting) error

M804 (tray elevation upward/

downward) error

M805 (tray shift) error

M806 (staple guide) error

M807 (staple) error

M808 (oscillating unit) error

<When copying>

After the roller starts

transfering, it does not reach

the shift position. (PS18 (roller

shift HP) is not turned ON.

After the roller starts returning,

PS18 (roller shift HP) is not

turned ON.

<When the power is ON/When

the door opens or closes>

After M2 starts operating, PS18

(roller shift HP) is not turned

ON.

After M3 (tray UP/DOWN) starts

moving, PS2 (tray upper limit)

or PS7 (stapled paper exit

upper limit) is not turned ON.

After M5 (register plate) starts

operating, PS8 (register plate

HP) is not turned OFF within a

certain period, or it is not turned

ON after it's turned OFF.

After M7 (paper exit roller) starts

moving, PS9 (paper exit beltHP) is not turned ON. (Only in

staple mode.)

After M8 (paper exit) starts

moving, opening/closing

action does not stop within a

certain period. (PS12 (paper

exit) is not turned ON or OFF.)

E70

F77-1

F77-2

F77-3

F77-4

F77-5

F77-6

F77-7

F77-8

E77-01

E77-02

E77-03

E77-04

E77-05

Finisher

abnormality

M2 (roller

shift)

abnormality

M3 (tray UP/

DOWN)

abnormality

M5 (register

plate)

abnormality

M7 (paper

exit roller)abnormality

M8 (paper

exit)

abnormality

The main body and the

finisher are stopped


relay is turned OFF,

rejecting any key input.


immediately and the main



Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON. Remove

any jammed

paper.

FNS CB (FNS control board)

Connector


M801 (conveyance)

FNS CB (FNS control board)M802 (1st exit)


M803 (2nd exit)


M804 (tray elevation upward/

downward)


M805 (tray shift)


M806(staple guide)


M807(staple)

FNS CB (FNS control board)M808 (oscillating unit)

M2 (roller shift), PS18

(roller shift HP)

M3 (tray UP/DOWN), PS2

(tray upper limit), PS7

(stapled paper exit upper

limit)

M5 (register plate), PS8

(register plate HP)

M7 (paper exit roller), PS9

(paper exit belt HP)

M8 (paper exit), PS12

(paper exit)

F S - 1 0 3



JAM LIST

5-15


warning

Releasing

methodEstimated defective parts

Warning

code

F S - 1 0 3

M11 (stapler

transfer

abnormality

M12 (stapler

rotary

abnormality

PS20

stacker

paper zero

sensor

abnormality

M10

(stapler F)

abnormality

M9 (stapler R)

abnormality

Weekly timer

abnormality

Power supply

abnormality

E77-06

E77-07

E77-08

E77-09

E77-11

E77-12

E80

F83-1

F83-2

F83-3

F83-4

F83-5

F83-7

After M11 (stapler) starts

operating, PS11 (stapler

transferHP) is not turned OFF,

or it is not turned ON after it's

turned OFF.After two places are stapled

and M12 (stapler rotary)

rotates, PS21 (stapler rotary

HP1) and PS22 (stapler rotary

HP2) are not turned ON.

(Diagonal rotation is not

properly completed.)

After MS12 (stapler rotary)

starts moving, the stapler

vertical rotation is not properly

completed while selecting two

staple places.

PS20 actuator is stuck and does

not return.

PS17 (stapler F HP) is not

truned ON after M10 started

reverse rotation by detecting

J72-31/J72-33.

PS15 (stapler R HP) is not

turned ON after M9 started

reverse rotation by detecting

J72-32/J72-33.

Communication error between

the weekly timer and the main

body.

40V has not arrived from the

DCDB (DC drive board).

24V (for the main body) has not

arrived from the DCDB (DC

drive bd.). (The door is closed.)

24V (for option use) has not arrived from the DCPS2

(DC power supply unit 2).

12V has not arrived.

8V has not arrived.

Processing system 5V has not

arrived.


immediately and the main



Stop communication, The

main relay is turned OFF

and all keys are not ac-

cepted.

When the power supply

error is detected in idling,

the main relay is turned

OFF and all keys are not

accepted.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON. Remove

any jammed

paper.

Turn the main

switch from OFF

to ON.

M11 (stapler), PS11

(stapler transfer HP)

M12 (stapler rotary),

PS21 (stapler rotary

HP1), PS22 (stapler

rotary HP2)

PS20 (stacker paper

zero sensor)

M10 (stapler F), PS17

(stapler F HP)

M9 (stapler R), PS15

(stapler R HP)

Weekly timer



CB (control board)



CB (control board)


CB (control board)

DCPS1 (DC power supply unit 1)CB (control board)


CB (control board)


CB (control board)

W e e k l y t i m e r

M

a i n b o d y



5-16

LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONSWhen an error occurs, there is a possibility that the following connectors are disconnected. If the connector is connected conduct

the troubleshooting outlined in the jam list.

Paper Jams

Code Identification numbers of disconnected connectors

CN53(paper feed), CN233(paper feed)

CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed), CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN122(paper feed),

CN230(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN327(paper feed),

CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed, CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN123(paper feed),

CN231(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN328(paper feed),

CN13(paper feed), CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC drive board),

CN720(LCT vertical conveyance), CN721(LCT vertical conveyance), CN726(LCT vertical conveyance)

CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC driveboard), CN712(LCT horizontal

conveyance), CN714(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN716(LCT horizontal conveyance)

CN64(paper feed), CN73(optical), CN141(paper feed)

CN703(DC drive board), CN713(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN722(LCT relay), CN725(lower left of the rear),

CN727(LCT horizontal conveyance)

CN34(drum), CN62(control board), CN85(on the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)CN86(2nd paper feed)

CN32(2nd paper feed), CN42(upper portion of the control board), CN46(2nd paper feed)

CN6(control board), CN40(fusing), CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)

CN555(ADU), CN562(ADU vertical conveyance)

CN551(ADU), CN556(ADU)

CN532(ADU), CN534(ADU), CN550(ADU), CN553(ADU), CN557(ADU), CN559(ADU)

CN552(ADU)

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

J17

J19

J21J30

J31

J32

J92

J93

J94

J96

Warning

Code Identification number of disconnected connectors

CN7(control board), CN17(paper feed)CN5(control board), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN51(drum), CN63(upper left of the rear)

CN530(ADU vertical conveyance), CN561(ADU vertical conveyance)

CN381(upper left of the front), CN395(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface)

CN2(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface), CN61(control board)

P17P27

P33

P51

P81



JAM LIST

5-17

Warning


CN8(control board), CN54(upper left of the front surface)

CN396(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface), CN401(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),

CN425(image processing board), CN430(image processing board), CN481(control board)

CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)

CN23(paper feed)

CN24(paper feed)

CN732(lower left of the rear surface)

CN731(lower right of the rear surface)

CN21(drum), CN39(drum), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN63(upper left of the rear surface)

CN42(above the control board), CN168(2nd paper feed)

CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of the paper exit surface)

CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)

CN66(optical)

CN22(control board), CN67(optical), CN142(left of the optical rear surface)

CN385(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)

CN428(image processing board), CN450(electronic RDH board)

CN411(A/D board), CN420(image processing board)CN421(image processing board), CN440(writing)

CN422(image processing board), CN441(writing)



CN161(upper left of the rear surface)

CN16(above the DC drive board), CN65(control board), CN75(DC drive board), CN96(DC drive board), CN202(DC

drive board), CN203(DC drive board), CN204(above the DC drive board), CN205(above the DC drive board)

CN9(control board), CN72(rear of the optical motor), CN74(rear of the optical motor), CN76(rear of the optical motor),

CN92(rear of the optical motor)

CN97(optical)

CN12(lower right of the front surface), CN14(toner replenishing)

CN48(upper left of the front surface), CN329(DC drive board)CN11(above the control board), CN15(above the control board)

CN49(above the exit paper surface), CN93(above the exit paper surface)

CN94(upper right of the DC drive board), CN521(DC drive board), CN554(ADU), CN564(ADU vertical conveyance)

CN124(upper left of the rear surface), CN125(upper left of the rear surface), CN200(DC drive board), CN201(upper left

of the rear surface)

CN421, CN422, CN423, CN424 (IP board)

E46

E47

E80

F18-1

F18-2

F18-3

F18-4

F22-1

F22-2

F35-1

F36-2

F41-2

F41-4

F43-2

F49-0

F49-1F49-2

F49-3

F49-4

F49-5

F50

F51

F51-9

F52

F53

F55F56

F57

F58

F59

E48-2



5-18

Power supply was not turned ON.

All LED were not lit.

LEDs for special functions were not

lit.

LEDs on the left side were not lit.

The area above the fluorescent

display tube was not lit.

The area below the fluorescent

display tube was not lit.

All keys were not accepted.

The weekly timer display did not

appear.

Special function keys were not

accepted.Density was faint.

White paper

Slight dirt on white paper

Faded image on white paper

Entirely black

Front surface and rear surface were

slipped.


CN28(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN382(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)

CN30(control board), CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN90(DC drive board), CN99(DC drive

board)

CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN99(DC drive board), CN150(control board), CN151(DC

drive board)CN29(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN60(control board)

CN476(weekly timer), CN477(weekly timer)

F67

F83-1

F83-2

F83-3

FJ3

Others

Classification Conditions

CN383(upper left of the front surface), CN390(lower right of the rear

surface), CN393(lower of the rear surface), CN397(lower right power

supply of the paper exiting surface), CN398(weekly timer), CN475(weekly

timer), CN479(weekly timer), CN752(lower right of the rear surface)

CN1(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN3(controlboard), CN4(control board), CN212(operation unit)

CN211(operation unit), CN222(operation unit), CN221(operation unit),

CN227(operation unit)

CN220(operation unit), CN232(operation unit)

CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),


CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),





CN17(toner replenishing), CN216(DC drive board), CN217(upper left of the

front surface)

CN62(control board)

CN84(upper of the rear surface)

CN85(above the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)

CN380(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN384(optical),

CN388(optical), CN400(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),

CN410(A/D board), CN412(optical)

CN68(paper feed), CN144(control board), CN145(paper feed), CN147(paper

feed)

Identification number of disconnected connectors

Power supply

error

Operation uniterror

Image

error



JAM LIST

5-19


CN337(lower left of the front fusing), CN81(lower right of the DC driving

board), CN82(upper left of the front), CN399(lower of exited paper surface)

CN78(power source of the lower right of the exit paper surface), CN95(writing

portion of the paper feed surface), CN223(control board), CN224(optical

drive board), CN225(optical drive board), CN226(optical drive board),CN228(optical drive board), CN320(writing), CN321(writing)

CN381(lower left of the front surface), CN384(optical), CN385(power

source of the lower right of the exited paper surface), CN388(optical)

CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of exit paper surface)

CN29(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN81(lower

right of the DC drive board), CN380(power source of the lower left of the exit

paper surface)

CN20(drum), CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN70(upper left of the rear

surface)

CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN71(upper of the control board)

CN73(optical), CN77(optical)CN25(paper feed), CN58(paper feed), CN59(paper feed), CN79(paper

feed)

CN701(DC drive board), CN711(1500LCT), CN724(1000LCT), CN728(1000

LCT drawer)

CN41(upper left of the front surface)

CN137(optical), CN143(optical), CN146(optical), CN152(left of the rear of

optical)

CN130(optical), CN133(optical), CN134(optical), CN138(optical), CN163(left

of the rear of optical)

CN43(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN101(right

(lower) of rear surface), CN114(control board)

CN102(right (upper) of the rear surface), CN116(control board)

CN505(ADU drawer), CN510(DC drive board), CN531(ADU)

CN56(rear of the control board)

CN120(control board), CN121(DC drive board), CN706(DC drive board),

CN709(1500LCT drawer), CN733(LCT stand), CN734(LCT stand)


Error in warm-

up

Lamp

abnormality

Dirt

Operationerror

Recognition

abnormality

Warmup is not completed.

Shading is not completed.

Exposure lamp is not lit.

Upper fusing lamp was not lit.

Lower fusing lamp was not lit.

Adhesion of carrier

Front edge or rear edge was dirty.

Touch the right side of optical.Upward/downward elevation motor

continued to rotate. (Gear is

damaged)

LCT elevation motor continued to

rotate. (Gear is damaged)

Total counter was not operated.

APS did not function.

APS sensed erroneously.

FIN did not recognize (Only G mode

could be selected or not operated.)

ADF was not recognized.

ADF was not recognized.

(Only 1-1 and 2-1 could be

recognized.)

The upper/lower step tray could not

be recognized.

LCT was not recognized.



5-20


CN44(paper feed), CN45(paper feed), CN47(paper feed)

CN710(1500LCT), CN723(1000LCT)

CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)

-CN560(ADU vertical conveyance)

CN324(upper of the control board), CN325(lower of the drum drawer)


Recognition

error

Others

Paper on a tray was not detected.

(“There is a paper” display that a

paper will be replaced.)

Weekly timer did not recognize.

-Verticle downward movement

occurred in the vicinity of ADU inlet.

“J21” did not appear during drum-

winding jamming.



ADJUSTMENTS

6-1

HOW TO USE THEADJUSTMENT MANUAL

This section details adjustments and procedures. Use this

section for making adjustments and as a checklist before

implementing corrective measures in the field.

1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?

2. Is the power supply properly grounded?

3. Is the machine sharing its power source with another high

current consumption machine that draws large currents

intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other

source of electrical consumption)

4. Is the installation environment suitable?

a.Keep out of high temperature, high humidity, direct sun

light and poor ventilation.

b.Make sure that the floor where the machine is installed

is level.

5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the originalitself?

6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper position?

7. Are the platen glass and ADF conveyance belt clean?

8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?

9. Are the copying materials at the end of their usable life?

(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)

10. Is there toner in the machine?

The following items should also be observed when repairing

the machine.

1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when

the main switch of this machine is turned OFF. Always

unplug the machine before beginning work. If it is absolutely

necessary to work with the power ON, exercise care to

avoid being caught in the rear scanning portion of the

exposure unit.

2. Special care should be taken when handling the fusing

unit since it operates at extremely high temperatures.

3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strong magnetic

field. Keep watches and metering equipment away from it.

4. Avoid damaging the drum with tools or similar objects.

5. Do not touch the IC pins with your bare hands.

ADJUSTMENTS WHENREPLACING PARTS

Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not only

required when a defective copy image occurs, but also after

replacing or reinstalling certain parts.

How to Use the Tables

The following items are used in the tables throughout this

section.

ModeIndicates the adjustment mode.

[47] : 47 mode

[25] : 25 mode

[36] : 36 mode

[35] : 35 mode

[ – ] : Normal mode

CodeIt shows the code used in each mode and a copy quantity

setting button.

VR• [–] None

• Indicates the VR number on the CB1 (main body control

board).

• Indicates the board name when neither VR or DSW

applies.

Page

Indicates the page to refer to in the adjustment section.

ConditionsNew: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required

when replacing a new part.

Reset: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required

when a part has been reinstalled.

Symbols used in the tables 1 2 ················· Indicates there is a priority sequence

for adjustments (including checks)

and settings.

(Empty circle): Indicates adjustments (including

checks) and settings that can be car-

ried out independently.



6-2

Page

Condition

A d j u s t m e n t a n d s e t t i n g i t e

m

Mode

Code

47

002

7-2

47

003

7-2

47

006

7-3

47

007

7-4

47

011

7-4

47

095

7-6

36

91

7-31

36

98

7-32

36

94

7-30

36

96

7-33

25

67-9

7-19

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

C h a r g e c o r o n a c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t

T r a n s f e r c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t

S e p a r a t i o n ( A C ) c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t

S e p a r a t i o n ( D C ) c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t

C h a r g e g r i d v o l t a g e a d j u s t m e n t

D e v e l o p i n g b i a s a d j u s t m e n t

L d e t e c t i o n a d j u s t m e n t

C o p y t y p e f r o n t e d g e t i m i n g a d j u s t m e n t

E l e c t r o n i c R D H

t y p e f r o n t e d g e t i m i n g a d j u

s t m e n t

A d j u s t m e n t t h e a m o u n t o f e r a s i n g t h e f r o n t e d g e o f t h e o r i g i n a l

L e a d - t o - t r a i l m a g n i f i c a t i o n a d j u s t m e n t

P a p e r f e e d i n g l o o p a m o u n t a d j u s t m e n t

O p t i c a l b r a k e a m o u n t a d j u s t m e n t

T r a y

p a p e r s i z e s e t t i n g

L i n e a r i t y e v a l u a t i o n p a t t e r n

A d j u s t m e n t o f g r a d a t i o n

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

New

New

New

New

New

New

New

New

-

New

-

Part Name

Drum

Developer

Charge corona wire

Charge corona control plate

Transfer/separation corona wire

High voltage unit 1

High voltage unit 2

Optics wire

Write unit

Memory IC

Setting the lower tray paper size

35

16

7-44

35

80

7-557-56

12

15 16

• New means replace with a new part and reset means to reset the part.

• The circles will have a number when there is an adjustment priority.

47

004

7-3

36

92

7-32

36

93

7-31



ADJUSTMENTS

6-3

SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P FUNCTION

The P function is capable of installing and confirming various

settings.

To confirm an item, enter its number using the copy quantity

buttons, while pressing the P button. On the copy quantity

display or the message display, the current value is displayed.

To change an item, refer to the appropriate page.

List of Confirmation Item by Means of theP FunctionThere are 6 items which can be confirmed items using the P

function.

Confirmation of the PM Count andResetting

Confirmation Method

Step

1

2

Operation (display)

While pressing the P button, press

copy quantity button 5.

Confirm the PM count on the

message display.

Operation point

P button,

copy quantity

button

Resetting Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation (display)

While pressing the page quantity

buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main

switch.

Press “090” using the copy quantity

button.

Press the start print button.

Input a start date using the copy

quantity button.


Operation point

Copy quantity

button,

main switch

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

Operation button

P + 1

P + 3

P + 4

P + 5

P + 7

P + 9

Item

Total count

Density shift

Developing count

PM count

Drum count

ECM/data control

Remarks

Reinitialization

impossible

Reinitialization

possible (See

the next page.)Reinitialization

possible (See

47-95 mode.)

Reinitialization

possible (See

47-90 mode.)

Reinitialization

possible (See

47-91 mode.)

Reinitialization

possible (See

data control.)



6-4

Setting the Density Shift

Setting Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation (display)



Confirm the density shift display (1

to 5) on the message display (see

*1).

Select a mode by means of a char-

acter/photograph button.

Input a density shift number which

is requested to change by means

of the copy quantity setting button

Press F1 in the menu selection

button.

Operation point

P button,

copy quantity

button

Character/pho-

tograph button

Copy quantity

button

Menu selection

button

*1 : Relation between the copy quantity button and the density

shift.

Copy quantity setting button

1

2

3

4

5

Density shift

Dark 2

Dark 1

Standard

Light 1

Light 2

Confirmation of the Drum Count andResetting

Confirmation Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation (display)

While pressing the page quantity


switch.

Press “091” using the copy quantity

buttons.


Input a start date by means of the

copy quantity buttons.


Operation point

Copy quantity

button,

main switch

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

Step

1

2

Operation (display)



Confirm the drum count by means

of a message display.

Operation point

P button,

copy quantity

button

Resetting Method

Service Data Control Operation ModeAccessNote: Mode 25 address 25 must be set to “2” and address 52

to “8” to allow entry into this mode.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation point

Main switch

Copy quantitybutton,

main switch

Copy quantity

button

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

UP/DOWN but-

tons

STOP/CLEAR

buttons

Main switch

Operation (display)

If the unit is ON, turn it OFF.

Press the [P] button while turningthe power ON.

Enter the password - if none has

been set, enter “0000000”. The

display goes to {Service Control

Operation Mode] when a valid

password is entered.

Select one of the desired items:

1: Limit parts count

2: Read parts copy count

3: Parts count reset

4: --------

5: Read jam count

6: --------

7: Read mode copy count

8: Read SC count

Enter the selected item.

Scroll through the entries within

the selected mode.

To return to step 1, above.

Turn the unit OFF and back ON

again to return to normal printer

operation.

Refer to the table on page 6-5 for additional information.

Revised 3/98



ADJUSTMENTS

6-5

Function to Control DataIn order to utilize the data control function, it is necessary to register a master key code in advance. Items capable of being confirmed

or installed with this function are different depending upon the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode.

Data Control Function ItemThis chart shows the relationship between the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode and the control item

number.

P05 = 0 : ECM is not selected; 1 : select the ECM (no stop in limit); 2 : select the ECM (stop after copy operation); 3 : select

the ECM (stop immediately)

P25 = 0 : protection; 1 : cancel copy control protection; 2 : cancel service control protection

P52 = 0 : no function; 8 : cancel protection;

Address No.

P05

P25

P52

25

Mode

0

0

0

--

--

--

Displaying copy count for

each size.

Detailed procedure 1

See *1.

--

--

--

0

2

0

Individual spare part

quantity limit setting.


See *3

Display individual spare

part copy limit.


See *3.

Copy quantity count re-

set for each spare part.


See *3.

ADF/RDH paper feed

count.


See *4.

Jam frequency count by

location.


See *5.

--

--

0

2

8

Individual spare part

quantity limit setting.


See *3

Display individual spare

part copy limit.


See *3.

Copy quantity count re-

set for each spare part.


See *3.

ADF/RDH paper feed

count.


See *4.

Jam frequency count by

location.


See *5.

Copy quantity count for

each mode used.


See *6.

Counting the number of

SC occurrences.


See *7.

Setting data

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

C o n t r o l i t e m

n u m b e r .

0

1

0

--

--

--

Displaying copy count for

each size.


See *1.

Reset of counters.°All reset°Individual resetDetailed procedure 2See *2.

--

--

Revised 3/9



6-6

Operation Procedure

Step

1

2

3

4

5

5-1

5-1

5-2

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-1

5-1

5-2

5-3

6

7

Operation point

P button,

copy quantity

button

Copy quantity

buttonCopy quantity

button

Start print button

Reduction/mag-

nification button

Reduction/mag-

nification button

Start print button

Reduction/mag-

nification button

Copy quantity

button

Start print button

Start print

button

Stop/clear

button

Red/mag button

Start print button

Stop/clear

button

P button,

stop/clear

button

* : Repeat procedures 3 through 6 if necessary.

* 1 Calling Copy Count for Each Size

No.

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

Paper size

-

11x17

8.5x14

8.5x11

8.5x5.55.5x8.5

-

8.5x14

Operation (display)



Input a master key code (8 digits).

Input a control item number (*)

Press the start print button. (*)

(*)

In the case of 1, 4, 6, 7 , 8, and 9

Select an item.

In the case of 5

Select a counter number.


In the case of 3

Select an item.

Set limit number.


In the case of 2 (all reset)


In the case 2 (individual reset)

Press the stop/clear button.

Select a counter number


Press the stop/clear button. (*)


the stop/clear button and return to

the normal mode.

9

10 Bypass feed

8.5x11

* 2 Copy Count Reset (Individual Reset) for Each Size

No.

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

10

* 3 Copy Quantity Limit Setting for Each Spare Part

Copy Quantity Count Calling for Each Spare Part

Copy Quantity Count Resetting for Each Spare Part

No.

1~20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28~30

Paper size

Counting copy frequency.

Counting frequency of manual paper feeding copy.

Counting frequency of the main body upper step

paper feeding.

Counting frequency of the main body lower step

paper feeding.

Counting frequency of the PFU upper step paper

feeding.

Counting frequency of the PFU lower step paper

feeding.

Counting copy frequency of the ADU paper feeding.

Counting copy frequency of the main body paper

ejecting.

Counting frequency of ADU paper feeding.

Paper size

-

11x17

8.5x148.5x11

8.5x5.5

5.5x8.5

-

8.5x14

8.5x11

Bypass feed



ADJUSTMENTS

6-7

Copy mode

Copy quantity in one side−>one side mode.

Copy quantity in one side−>both side mode.

Copy quantity in both sides−>one side mode.

Copy quantity in both sides−>both side mode.

Copy quantity from one side to one side when usingthe ADF.

Copy quantity from one side to both sides when

using the ADF.

Copy quantity in a staple sort mode.

Copy quantity in a sort mode.

Copy quantity in a group mode.

Frequency of staple.

Copy quantity in the same magnification.

Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 1.41/2.00.




Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 0.82/0.65.Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 0.71/0.50.

Copy quantity in an arbitrary magnification.

Copy quantity in a zoom magnification.

Copy quantity in the maximum magnification of

2.00.

Copy quantity in the minimum magnification of 0.50.

Copy quantity in the AMS mode.

Copy quantity in the APS mode.

Copy quantity in the AES mode.

Copy quantity in the interruption mode.

Copy quantity in the manual feeding mode.

Copy quantity in the page continuous copying mode.

Copy quantity in the frame erasure mode.

Copy quantity in the folding erasure mode.

Copy quantity in the same magnification image shift

mode.

Copy quantity in the reduction magnification image

shift mode.

Copy quantity in a thick paper mode.

Copy quantity in a thin paper mode.

Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 1.

Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 2.

Copy quantity in an OHP mode.

Copy quantity in a mixed mode.

Reading frequency of a job memory.Frequency of utilizing a pre-heating mode.

Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 1.

Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 2 to 5.

Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 6 to 10.

Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 11 or

more.

Copy start frequency in intersheet 1.

Copy start frequency in intersheet 2.

* 4 Counting the Number of ADF Paper Feeding

No.

1

2

3

4

Paper feed mode

ADF/RDH

RADF/RRDH

RDH(sort, staple sort)

RRDH(sort, staple sort)

* 5 Counting the Frequency of Jamming for Each Origin

Point

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

2021

22

23

24

Jamming

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

-

J16J17

J19

J21

J31

J32

J61

J62

J63

J72

J75

J92

J93

J94J11-1

J11-2

J11-3

J11-4

No.

25

26

27

28

29

30

3132

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

4445

46

47

48

* 6 Counting Copying Number for Each Mode Used

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1617

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

3839

40

41

42

43

44

45

Jamming

J12-1

J12-2

J12-3

J12-4

J13-1

J13-2

J13-3J13-4

J14-1

J14-2

J14-3

J14-4

J30

J74

J95

J96

J10-2

J10-4

J17-1

J17-2J17-3

J17-4

J17-5

J17-6





DIAGNOSTICS

7-1

47 MODE AND MULTIMODE

Setting the 47 Mode and Multimode47 Model

This mode provides self-diagnostic functions by activating I/O

(input/output) checks of loads and signals. Various adjustments

are also performed in this mode.

• Setting method

a. Turn the main switch OFF.

b. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing down on the

4 and 7 copy quantity buttons.

c. To check input signals

(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the

desired signal (sensors, etc.) by referring to the I/O

check list.

(2) The level of the signal (Hi or Lo) will appear on the

magnification display.

Note: “Hi” and “Lo” indicate the signal level applied to the CB,

it does not pertain to the mechanical state of the sensor

or switch. The mechanical position of the sensor or

switch with respect to what signal it produces at the CB

is dependent upon its function in the copier.

d. To check outputs loads

(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the

desired output (load, etc.) by referring to the I/O check

list.

(2) Press the start print button.

Depending on the output, a load will be activated or a

signal will be output.

Start print button

Before pressing

After pressing

Description

Input signal level indication

Output load operation/signal

Code

Input

Output

the I/O check code list.

• Setting Method

a. Enter the 47 mode.

b. Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the

desired I/O. (Only codes that support the multimode can be

used.)

c. Press the P button.

d. The standard mode (existing within the multimode) will

flash on the copy quantity display.

e. Enter the desired multimode number using the copy quantity

buttons.

f. The multimode number will flash on the copy quantity

display.

g. Press the P button.

h. Press the start print button.

i. After setting the multimode, perform the check in accordance

with the requirements of the particular 47 mode I/O check.

j. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 multimode.

e. Press the stop/clear button to disable the output.

f. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 mode.

2. Multimode

This mode exists within the 47 mode. It enables multiple I/ O checks from a single I/O check code. The functions that

support the multimode are indicated by an ”M“ marked in



7-2

Initializing the NVRAMThis procedure (1) details the steps required to initialize the

7050 NVRAM,(2) specifies the adjustments that MUST be reset

afterward, and (3) presents the steps for storing of the new

adjustment data and restoring the data to previous settings if

required. Initialization is required if the NVRAM becomes

defective and needs to be replaced, if the stored data in memory

becomes corrupted, or in need of a fresh start to reset machineparameters.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all counter values (to factory

settings) within the 25, 35, 36, and 47 modes. It is important to

follow the procedure as given below to properly reset the

copier.

Setting MethodImportant note: Assuming that the developer in the machine is

good and does not need replacing, enter mode 47, code 17, and

record the L-detection reference databefore proceding with the

initialization, which will reset this value. Reenter this recorded

data after the initialization process is completed. If this step is

not performed, new developer will have to be added and the L-

detection adjustment performed.

Adjustments Required after InitializationThe following adjustments must be accomplished in the order

given, in particular, adjustments 2 through 6, after the initialization

procedure.

Adjustment Mode/Code

1. Charge corona grid 47/007

2. Horizontal magnification 36/0933. Lead edge timing (copy) 36/091

4. Lead edge timing (ERDH) 36/098

5. Lead edge erase 36/092

6. Loop timing 36/094

7. L-detection * 47/095

8. Paper size settings for trays 2, 3, and 4 25/069

9. Gradation 35/080/P6 (LD1)

35/080/P7 (LD2)

* Can be omitted if the current value at mode 47, code 17, is

recorded before the initialization process (47/092) is

performed, and this value is reentered after the initialization.

Storing all Settings into MemoryEnter mode 47, code 096, to store the data from the above

adjustments into NVRAM.

To Restore Data Back to Mode 47, Code 096,SettingsIf changes to the setting(s) were made after the data was stored

to NVRAM using mode 47, code 096, enter mode 47, code 093

to restore the setting(s) back to the last mode 47, code 096

memory save.

IMPORTANT NOTE on DMAX

When initialization is performed, the value at mode 47, code

050, which is the control value for both the developer rotation

speed and D-max, is set to a factory default of “2” ...

(1) This value will not cause any problems if the fusing heater

temperature at the time the unit is turned ON is below 50°C

because a D-max correction will automatically be performed;

however...

(2) if the fusing heater temperature is above 50°C at the time

of power ON, D-max correction MUST be accomplished by

placing the unit in mode 47, code 18, and pressing the START/

PRINT button.

If you are not sure about the machine temperature, perform the

D-max manually.

Failure to accomplish this step when requiredwill result in extremely light copies.

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Magnification/

reduction button

or the P and

copy quantity

buttons

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

START PRINT

button, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation (display)

While pressing copy quantity


switch.

Select address P00 and enter “0”

at this address.

Turn OFF the machine, then, while

pressing copy quantity buttons 4

and 7, turn ON the main switch.

Input “092” using the copy quantity

buttons.

Press the START/PRINT button

and turn OFF the machine.

Reselect the 25 mode and enter

“9” at address P00 using the normal

procedures.

Exit the mode.

Revised 3/99



DIAGNOSTICS

7-3

Transfer Current Adjustment

Setting Method

Operation (display)

While pressing copy quantitybuttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main

switch.


buttons.

Confirm that the copy quantity dis-

play indicates “3”.

Press the P button.

The existing data will flash on the

display.

Using the copy quantity buttons,

enter the correct value to adjust

the transfer current to within

standards.

Setting range: 0 ~ 255

Standard value (targeted) : 87

Amount of change per step :

about 0.5 µA

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantitybuttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Operation (display)



switch.


buttons.



Press the P button.


display.



the AC separation current to within

standards.




about 1.5 µA

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Separation (AC) Current Adjustment

Setting Method

Separation (DC) Current Adjustment

Setting Method

Operation (display)



switch.


buttons.



Press the P button.


display.

Using the copy quantity buttons,enter the correct value to adjust

the DC separation current to within

standards.




about 0.6 µA

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantitybuttons

P button

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switchCopy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Charge Corona Current Adjustment

Setting Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation (display)



switch.Enter “002” using the copy quantity

buttons.



Press the P button.


display.


enter the value necessary to adjust

the charge corona current to within

standards.


Target value = 170


about 1.2µA

Press the P button.

Revised 3/99



7-4

Charge Grid Voltage AdjustmentSetting Method

Operation (display)



switch.

Input “007” using the copy quantitybuttons.



Press the P button.


display.



the charging grid voltage to within

standards.




about 1.6 µA

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch


P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

When Replacing the Drum(1) Check the standard of the new drum written on the inside

of the flange.

(2) Set the metter.

+ grid pin

- ground

Range DC1000V

(3) 47-007 mode. (above procedure item 1 and 2)

(4) Start print button ON.

(5) Check the meter value.

(6) Adjust by using steps 3 to 6 in the setting method

procedure.

Developing Bias Adjustment

Operation (display)



switch.


buttons.



Press the P button.


display.



the developing bias to within

standards.




about 1.2 volts

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Setting method



DIAGNOSTICS

7-5

Test Pattern Density Selection

Setting Method

Adjustment Mode List• This feature displays the adjustment available with this

machine; however, these adjustments are not selectable by

this means.

Setting method

*1: See the adjustment mode list in this section for a complete

listing of these adjustment items.

Operation (display)


switch.


buttons.



Press the start print button. An

item and corresponding data are

displayed.

Press the reduction/magnification

button to select a different

adjustment item (*1).

Step

1

2

3

4

Entry


main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

R e d u c t i o n /

magnif ication

button

Operation (display)



switch.Input “013” using the copy quantity

buttons.



Press the P button.


display.


enter the value corresponding to

the test pattern desired.


Note: This setting selects the

desired overall halftone test pattern

that is generated within the mode

35, code 01. The following test

patterns can be selected: 0: white,

70: halftone, 255: black

Press the P button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switchCopy quantity

buttons

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Operation (display)



switch.


buttons.




Initial Setting• This setting reinitializes the machine back to the initial

factory settings.

Setting Method

Step

1

2

3

Note: After completing the test pattern output, restore the

value to 255.



7-6

L-Detection Adjustment• When performing this adjustment, the toner density is

automatically sensed. The voltage corresponding to the

concentration of toner in the new developer will be memorized.

Note: Perform this adjustment during machine setup or when

replacing developer. If developer that is being used is

adjusted, the toner density of the developer in use will

become the reference value, resulting in an incorrectadjustment value.

Setting Method

Telephone Number Setting• This feature is used to register telephone numbers.

Telephone numbers are displayed on the message display

for generation service calls.

Setting Method

Operation (display)


switch.


buttons.

Press the start print button. The

following will be displayed:

TEL NO.

XXX-XXX-XXXX

Enter the telephone number using

the copy quantity buttons. Press P

for a dash (-).

Press the set/F1 button.

Press the stop/clear button.

Step

1

2

3

4

56

Entry


main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Copy quantity

buttons, start

print button

Set/F1 buttonS t o p / c l e a r

button

Operation (display)



switch.


buttons.




• The sti rr ing screw in thedeveloping unit rotates and the

L-detection sensor detects the

developer density.

• After about 5 minutes, sensing

automatically stops and “ADJ

OK” is displayed.

Step

1

2

3

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons,

main switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button



DIAGNOSTICS

7-7

Input Check List

CVR FB signal

Toner level detecting signal

Internal temperature detecting signalTH1 signal

TH2 signal

Humidity sensor signal

Dmax MONI signal

Dmax signal

Drum jamming signal

No-paper detecting signal Contents of M:

Tray upper limit detecting Common to 10, 12, 16, & 19

Paper size signal 1: Main body upper

Display for each paper size 2: Main body lower

11x17:7, 8.5x14:6, 8.5x11R:8, 3: LCT right

8.5x11:5, 5.5x8.5R:C, 5.5x8.5:1 4: LCT left

Only to 10Pre-try detecting 5: Bypass feed

Paper feed sensor signal

1: 2nd paper feed stop signal

2: Intermediate conveyance sensor

3: Optical synchronization sensor

4: LCT conveyance sensor (1000)

5: LCT horizontal conveyance sensor (1500)

Paper exit sensor signal

Interlock signals

1: Paper conveyance door

2: LCT interlock

3: ADU interlock

4: Fuser level detectOptics sensor signals

1: Optics return/home

2: Shading

3: Optics return/home

4: Registration

6: ADF/EE

7: Over run

Main body ROM version

P-001-P to display C1 ROM version




Processing ROM version

P-001-P to display I1 ROM version

P-002-P to display I2 ROM version

H L

State of display and

signal sourceMulti

modeCodeClassification Symbol Name

000

001

002003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

012

016

019

020

022

023

030

048

049

DCPS2

TLD

TH1

TH2

TCSB

TCSB

TCSB

*1

*2

*3

PS14

PS20

PS19

PS144

PS146

PS25

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

Analog signal

Paper feed

Normal

Yes

No paper

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Abnormal

No

Paper

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Paper feed

and

conveyance

Optics

Main body

*1 - PS12, PS13, PS15, PS140, PS141 *2 - PS16, PS17, PS142, PS143 *3 - PS20, PS21, PS200, PS210

PS11

PS160

PS158

PS24

PS7

PS3

PS5

PS4

PS2

PS1

Note: 47-197 - START/PRINT displays installed ERDH SIMM

memory in Mbs.

Revised 3/98



7-8

050

060

064

069

079

080

082

089

Checking whether or not a connector is connected

1: A/D board connection (CN420)

2: LD1 board connection (CN421)

3: LD2 board connection (CN422)

4: INDEX board connection (CN423)

5: Sub scanning correction motor connection (CN424)

6: Scanner I/F board connection (CN426)

7: CFF I/F board connection (CN427)

8: Electronic RDH board connection (CN428)

9: Printer I/F board connection (CN429)

Interlock signals

1: ADF open/close interlock

2: Reversal portion interlock

DF306

1: No paper detecting

Signal for connect ADF

1: DF306

Signal for connect finisher

1: FS-102

Interlock signal

Paper detecting signal

1: Paper feed

2: Reversal detect

3: Vertical conveyance

4: Paper exit 1

5: Paper exit 3

6: No paper7: Paper exit 2

Signal for connect ADU

H L

State of display and

signal sourceMulti


MS301

MS302

PS301

PS158

M

M

M

M

M

M

Connect

OPEN

PAPER

ADF

FS

OFF

OFF

ON

Not-

connect

CLOSE

NO

PAPER

NO

ADF

NO FS

ON

ON

OFF

Intrinsic

function

ADF

and

RADF

Sorter

and

Finisher

ADU

PS152

PS153

PS157

PS154

PS156

PS151PS155



DIAGNOSTICS

7-9

Output Check List

Exposure lamp

Toner supply motor

Charging

Transfer

Separation (AC)

Transfer + separation (AC + DC)

Separation (DC)

Grid

Dmax / γ LED

JAM detecting LED

Guide plate

Bias

Test pattern density

γ correction level adjustment

L-detection reference data

Dmax level adjustment

1st paper feed solenoid

1: Main body, upper 2: Main body, lower

3: LCT, right (1000) 4: LCT left (1500)

5: Bypass feed

Paper feed motor

1: High speed - paper feeding (main body)

2: Low speed - bypass feed (main body)

3: LCT

1st paper feed clutch

1: Main body, upper 2: Main body, lower

3: LCT, right (1000) 4: LCT, left (1500)

5: Bypass feed

Intermediate conveyance clutch

2nd paper feed clutch

Separation claw solenoid

Optical return trip driving

Polygon motor

Polygon motor + APC

Shading correction + AGC + AOC

Platen AES operation

Laser 1 PWM (pulse width modulation)

Laser 2 PWM

Correction of sub-scanning beam

Multi


000

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

016017

018

019

020

021

022

023

024

025

029

030031

032

033

034

035

036

037

038

039

L1

M10

HV1

HV2

HV2

HV2

HV2

HV1

HV1

HV1

SD1

SD2

SD141

SD140

SD3

M13

M13

M140

MC5

MC6

CL1

CL2

MC7

MC8

MC3

SD4

M12

M5

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

X

X

X

X

X

X

Temporary

Analog signal

Optics

Paper feed

Do not adjust these

settings in the field.

Revised 3/99



7-10

040

041

042

043

044

045

046

047

048

049

050

051

052

053

054

055

056

057

060

064

069

080

084

090091

092

093

094

095

096

097

098

099

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

Main motor (1-31; use 16)

Drum motor

Fan motor

1: Main fan 2: Optical fan

3: Suction fan 4: Image processing fan

5: Electronic RDH fan 6: ADU fan

7: Developing fan

Total counter

Charge cleaning mtr -> Trans./Sep. cleaning mtr (continuous)

Fusing heater lamp

1: Thin paper mode 2: Standard mode

3: Thick paper mode

Charge cleaning motor

Transfer/separation cleaning motor

Operation unit (all are lit)

Buzzer

Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in

400 dpiPCL

PSL

Developing screw motor

Toner supply motor

Message test

Charge cleaning motor, returning

Transfer/separation cleaning motor, returning

Drive (DF306)

1: Conveyance belt (forward)

2: Conveyance belt (reverse)

Switch (DF 306)

1: Paper feeding plate solenoid

2: Paper feeding solenoid

3: Reversing solenoid

4: Swing back solenoid

5: Speed reduction paper exiting solenoid

Test mode

1: Single-sided document continuously

2: Single-sided document one by one

3: Double-sided document continuously

4: Double-side document one by one

ADU paper feed motor

ADU load

1: Clockwise clutch 2: Counterclockwise clutch

3: Conveyance clutch

4: Longitudinal conveyance solenoid

PM counter clearProcess counter clear 1: Drum counter

Process initial setting (all settings)

Initial setting (data return in delivery from process) 36 mode

Adjustment mode list display mode* (see page 7-12)

L-detection reference value automatic adjustment (developing

counter reset)

Process delivery completing setting 25/36 mode

Lighting adjustment

1: Mode 1 2: Mode 2

Transfer and separation humidity setting

Unvolatile reference mode

Multi


M1

M4

FM16, FM2

FM14

FM11

FM22

FM152

C(T)

M7, M8

L2,L4

M7

M8

M3

PCL

PSL

M35

M10

M7

M8

M301

M151

X

X

X

RADF

ADU

Main body

Intrinsic

function

Adjustment

process and

others

Do not adjust these

setttngs in the field.

CL151

CL152

CL153

SD152

Revised 3/99



DIAGNOSTICS

7-11

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

Transfer

Separation (AC)

Separation (DC)

Grid

Bias

Laser 1 PWM

Laser 2 PWM

Main motor speed

Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in

600 dpi

Setting password of the weekly timer (0000 = no password)

Telephone number setting

AGC setting

AOC setting

Setting a targeted value of white correction

Setting a targeted value of black correction

Checking the SIMM volume of the electronic RDH

Checking SIMM of the electronic RDHSetting offset quantity for correcting sub-scanning slip

Adjusts the printer mode to be automatically set in the NOVRAM

for charge, grid, transfer, separation, bias, and laser power.

Starts gamma auto. compensation.

Multi


103

104

106

107

111

136

137

140

150

160

180

190

191

192

193

197

198199

120

114

HV2

HV2

HV2

HV1

HV1

M1

M3

X

X

X

X

X

Special mode

600dpi mode

Do not adjust these

settings in the field.

Additional codes:



7-12

Adjustment Mode List

CHARGE (1) ADJ1. Charge current

2. Transfer current

3. Separation (AC) current

4. Separation (DC) current

5. Grid voltage

6. Developing bias

7. Transfer current

(600dpi)

8. Separation (AC) current(600dpi)

9. Separation (DC) current

(600dpi)

10. Grid voltage (600dpi)

11. Developing bias

(600dpi)

12. Adjusting Dmax level

13. Laser 1 PWM (600dpi)




17. LD1 offset adjustment

(400dpi)


(400dpi)


(600dpi)

20. LD2 offset adjustment(600dpi)

21. Separation claw ON

22. Separation claw OFF

23. Adjustment one-sided

24. SGU adjustment one-

sided (table)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Contents of message Data (referential value)

1st line 2nd line Data from 47-92 mode Range of dataList of adjustments

Nonadjustable

47-002+P

47-003+P

47-004+P

47-006+P

47-007+P

47-011+P

47-103+P

47-104+P

47-106+P

47-107+P

47-111+P

47-018+P

47-036+P

47-037+P

47-136+P

47-137+P

35-005+P+3

35-005+P+4

35-005+P+7

35-005+P+8

25-01+P

25-02+P

36-097+P

35-016+P

170

50(87 outside Japan)

100

(100 outside Japan)

67

(57 outside Japan)

145

169

-

-

50

88

88

50

50

20

20

20

20

1

6

0

0

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~99

0~99

0~99

0~99

-64~+64

-64~+64

-64~+64

-64~+64

0~9

0~9

-32~+32

-32~+32

Note: If 47/94 will not display, use 47/96 to turn ON. 47/92 will disable 47/94.

TRANSFER (1) ADJ

SEPARAT (AC)(1)ADJ

SEPARAT (DC))(1)ADJ

GRID (1) ADJ

BIAS (1) ADJ

TRANSFER (2) ADJ

SEPARAT (AC)(2)ADJ

SEPARAT (DC)(2)ADJ

GRID (2) ADJ

BIAS (2) ADJ

Dmax ADJ

LD1 POWER (1)

LD2 POWER (1)

LD1 POWER (2)

LD2 POWER (2)

LD1 OFFSET (1)

LD2 OFFSET (1)

LD1 OFFSET (2)

LD2 OFFSET (2)

SEPARATOR CLAW ON

SEPARATOR CLAW OFF

LD CENTERING (1)ADJ

LD CENTERING (2)ADJ

Revised 3/98



DIAGNOSTICS

7-13 Revised 3/9

25. 5.5x8.5R backside is

one-sided

26. Lead edge timing

(first copy)

27. Lead edge timing (E-RDH: second copy)

28. Lead edge timing

(printer)

29. Erased amount of the

lead edge of document

30. Longitudinal magnifica-

tion adjustment

31. SGU longitudinal magnifi-

cation adjustment

32. Adjustment of loop amount

of paper feeding (tray)

33. Adjustment of loop amountof paper feeding (bypass)

34. Adjustment of optical

brake amount

35. Rotation number of

developing motor

36. Rotation number of

developing motor (600dpi)

37. Absolute position of

laser 1

38. Absolute position of

laser 2

39. Sub-scanning slipamount

40. Main-scanning slip

amount

41. AOC1 data

42. AOC2 data

43. AGC1 data

44. AGC2 data

45. Copy quantity in tray 1




See note

below

X

X



Nonadjustable

35-031+P

36-091+P

36-098+P

36-099+P

36-092+P

36-093+P

35-016+P+2

36-094+P

36-094+P

36-096+P

47-050+P

47-150+P

35-80+P+5

35-80+P+5

-

-

-

-

0

+24

+29

+51

+28

-20

16

+10

+60

7

17

5

00998

01060

62

00524

68

84

44

45

0

0

0

0

-94~+99

(-99~+99)

-100~+99

(-99~+99)

-100~+99(-99~+99)

-99~+99

0~99

-20~+20

-1~31

-20~+90

-20~+90

0~9

(-9~+9)

1~32

1~32

0~999999

0~999999

0~999999

0~999999

-

-

-

REGISTRATION (3)

IMAGE MISSING ADJ

MAGNIFI (1) ADJ

MAGNIFI (2) ADJ

LOOP ADJUST (TRAY)

LOOP ADJUST (BYPASS)

BRAKE ADJUST

DEVELOPING MOTOR (1)

DEVELOPING MOTOR (2)

LD1 POSITION

LD2 POSITION

VERTICAL SHIFT

HORIZONTAL SHIFT

AOC CH1 Vol.

AOC CH2 Vol.

AGC CH1 Vol.

AGC CH2 Vol.

TRAY 1

TRAY 2

TRAY 3

TRAY 4

REGISTRATION (2)

REGISTRATION (1)

CENTERING (A5R) ADJ

Note pertaining to adjustments 26, 27, and 28:

Mode 25, address 89 must be set to a number other than “1” before adjustment items #26 and #27 will function. However, the alternatives for these

adjustments located under modes 36 and 35 of this DIAGNOSTICS Section can be used in lieu of resetting 25/89. Note that the registration forSuperfin

mode MUST be accomplished using 35/80 + P5 because ERDH memory is not used. For all other modes , 36/98 or 36/80 + P5 are used.



7-14

*1 = Drum monitor does not become 6 volts. *2 = Dmax signal does not become 1.5 volts. *3 = Dmax signal does not

change. *4 = Gamma signal does not become 9 volts. *5 = Gamma signals are higher than programmed values.

47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103Using mode 47, code 75, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button to select the desired function;

press STOP when completed.

Using mode 47, code 76, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button.

COPY COUNT(BYPASS)

COPY COUNT(ADU)

D-MAX ERROR(1)

D-MAX ERROR(2)

D-MAX ERROR(3)

GAMMA ERROR(1)

GAMMA ERROR(2)

49. Bypass feed copy

quantity

50. ADU copy quantity

51. Dmax error (1) *1



54. Gamma error (1) *4

55. Gamma error (2) *5



Nonadjustable

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0~999999

0~999999

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

0~255

Item

M1

M7

M14

M2

M2

M2

M8

M3

M3

M12

Multi Mode

01

02

03

10

11

12

13

16

17

18

Function/Description

Conveyance motor

Paper exit roller motor

Stacker entrance motor

Roller shift motor (1 rotation)

Roller shift motor (forward)

Roller shift motor (reverse)

Paper exit opening motor

Tray up/down motor (raise)

Tray up/down motor (lower)

Stapler rotation motor (angled)

Multi Mode

19

20

23

26

28

30

31

32

33

34

40

Item

M12

M5

M11

M10

M9

SD1/SD5

SD2

SD4

SD1

SD3

–


Stapler rotation motor (vertical)

Alignment plate motor

Stapler movement motor

Front stapler motor

Rear stapler motor

Gate/bypass solenoid

Printer paper exit solenoid

Paper exit opening solenoid

Gate solenoid

Grip solenoid

Reset/run mode

Multi Mode

01

02

03

04

05

0607

10

12

13

15

16

17

20

21

23

24

25

26

Item

PS2

PS3

PS4

PS5

PS6

PS7PS8

PS9

PS11

PS12

PS14

PS15

PS16

PS17

PS18

PS20

PS21

PS22

MS1


Tray upper limit sensor

Tray lower limit sensor

Finisher entrance passage senor

Stacker conveyance passage sensor

Paper exit - 1 sensor

Stapler paper exit upper limit sensorAlignment plate home position sensor

Paper exit belt home position sensor

Stapler movement home position sensor

Paper exit opening sensor

Rear stapler empty sensor

Rear stapler home position sensor

Front stapler empty sensor

Front stapler home position sensor

Roller shift home position sensor

Stacker empty sensor

Stapler rotation home position 1 sensor

Stapler rotation home position 2 sensor

Finisher door interlock

Intication When High

Upper limit detected

Lower limit detected

Paper detected

Paper detected

Paper detected

Paper detectedHome position detected

Home position detected


Opening is closed

Staples remaining


Staples remaining



Paper detected



Door is open

Revised 3/99



DIAGNOSTICS

7-15

25 MODEThe 25 mode is used exclusively for rewriting the contents of the

memory and therefore does not support normal copy operations.

Data entered into memory is used by the microprocessor to

establish certain parameters.

Setting Method1. Turn the main switch OFF.

2. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing buttons 2 and

5. This will enable the 25 mode.

3. Select the address where the data is to be changed.

There are two ways to select the address:

a. Using the reduction/magnification buttons. The address

(P.**) will appear on the display.

b. Using the copy quantity buttons.

(1) Press the P button. The current address selected

will flash on the display.

(2) Enter the desired address by pressing the copy

quantity buttons. The selected address will flash onthe display.

(3) Press the P button. The display will change from a

flashing address number to one that is constantly lit.

4. The data currently stored in that address will appear in the

display (tens digit).

5. Enter the new data by pressing the copy quantity buttons.

The newly entered data will appear in the display (ones

digit).

6. Press the start print button. This will rewrite the data and

change the display to show the new data in the tens digit

position.

7. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 25 mode.

ECM SettingThis selects the function of the ECM mode.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P05.

Enter the required data:

0: ECM is not selected.

1: ECM is selected

(without stop)

3: ECM is selected

(with natural (soft) stop)

5: ECM is selected

(with forced (hard) stop)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Copy Control/Service Control Mode EnableThis feature selects whether the copy control mode access is

enabled, the service control mode access is enabled, or both

modes are disabled.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P25.


0: Protect

1: Copy control is enabled

2: Service control is enabled


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P52.


0: No function

8: Cancel protection.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantitybuttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Data Control Function SelectThis feature sets the protection for the service control operator

mode.



7-16

Pre-heat Mode Temperature SelectionThis feature selects the fusing temperature for the pre-heat

mode.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P12.


0: 160°C1: 170°C2: 180°CPress the start print button.

Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switchMagnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Pre-heat Mode Shut-off TimeThis feature selects the shut-off time for the pre-heat mode.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P19.


0~3: 1 hour

4~6: 2 hour

7~9: 3 hour


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Selection of Fusing Control During AutoShut OffThis feature enables/disables continued control of the fusing

unit during an auto shut off.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P49.


0: No

1: Yes


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, mainswitch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Setting of Auto Shut-off and Auto Pre-heat TimingSets auto shut off and auto pre-heat timing.

Note: To enable this selection to function, address 49 in the 25

mode must be set to “1” (default is “0”).

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P62.

Enter the required data:Auto shut off

0: No

1: 2 minutes

2: 6 minutes

3: 10 minutes

Auto pre-heat

4: 2 minutes

5: 6 minutes

6: 10 minutes


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.


Start print button

Revised 3/99



DIAGNOSTICS

7-17

Selecting Outside Erasing the OriginalAPS sensors are used to determine image area with document

feeder open. Based on standard size paper

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P70.


0: Erase outside the original.

1: Entire image in the platen

mode.

2: Transfer paper prior any time


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Selecting Preliminary Rotation of PolygonMotorA combination of 25/90 and 25/91 is used to set the low speed

idle of the polygon motor.

If set to “0” (default), 25/90 prevents the polygon motor from

stopping or rotating at low speed when at idle. (The motor wil

continuously operate at a normal copying speed of 16,535 rpm.

Noise during idle operation can be prevented by using 25/90 to

either decrease its idle speed or stop it (see table below).

Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation TimingThe 25/91 setting sets the time duration at which the polygon

motor will run at copying speed before reverting to the speed

selected in 25/90 (see table below).

Note: 1. Both factory defaults at “0” have the motor running

16,535 rpm at all times.

2. Reducing the idle speed to minimize noise level wi

result in the delay of the copy cycle start due to the

additional time required to attain operating speed.

* When data 1 is selected, whole image determined by

the selected paper paper size is copied only in case ofplaten copy.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P92.


0: Rectangular

1: Corresponding oblique original


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P90.


0: No preliminary rotat. 16535rpm(default)

1: Preliminary rotation at 14000 rpm



4: Stop


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Revised 3/99

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P91.


0: 15 seconds (default)

1: 30 seconds

2: 60 seconds

3: 120 seconds


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button



7-18

Functions When Auto Button is Pressed orOriginal is Placed in ADFThis feature allows for selecting functions when the auto button

is pressed or when an original is place in the ADF.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P56.


0 to 3 (see *1)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, mainswitch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

*1: Automatic button function and ADF original setting indica-

tion.

DataAutomatic button

function

ADF original setting

indication

0

1

2

3

Full auto

Manual select*

Full auto

Manual select*

ADF select

ADF select

Full auto

Manual select*

ATS SelectionThis feature is used to set trays for ATS.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P08.


0: ATS is not selected.

1: ATS is selected for all trays.

2: ATS is not selected for the

upper tray.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Note: ATS order is 2/3/4/1/2 unless data 2 is selected;

then, the order is 2/3/4/2.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P50.


0: One count

1: Two counts


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

11x17 Double Count SettingThis feature specifies whether or not the machine will count one

11x17 copy as two 8.5x11 copies.

Switching Auto/Manual PriorityThis feature enables setting parameters that will be automatically

selected when the auto button is pressed.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P58.


0 to 7 (see *1)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantitybuttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

*1: Settings that are available.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

AES

AES

AES

AES

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Data

APS

APS

Manual

Manual

APS

APS

Manual

Manual

ADF select APS select AES select

*Selectable by 25 mode, address P58.



DIAGNOSTICS

7-19

Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4Sets paper size for trays 2, 3, and 4.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select addresses:P67: Tray 2

P68: Tray 3

P69: Tray 4


0 to 9 (see *1)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/ reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

0

1

23

4

11x17

8.5x14

8.5x11R8.5x11

8.5x5.5

Data Paper size

*1: Paper size selection list.

FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer)Set if the sub-tray is used and paper exit direction.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P07.

Modify data.

0: Sub-tray is not used.

2: Sub-tray is used. (Reverese

paper exit)

3: Sub-tray is used. (Normal

paper exit)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P andcopy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

FS-103 Original Count Over ControlSet the operation that is used when the original quantity

exceeds the specified limit.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Designate address P11.

Modify data.

0 - 9 (*1)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

*1

Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Modification

Stops immediately (at max. 50 sheets)





Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 50 sheets)







7-20

*1

*2

Non-staple mode

Group mode

Offset mode

Staple mode

4

Performing lower limit detection by

PS3 (tray lower limit)

Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper

limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper

(more than 1 sec)

Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)

abnormal ON by exiting paper.

Stop at predetermined number ofcopies. (*2)

Message Language SelectionThis feature selects the language that will appear in the display.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P14.


0: American

1: Brit ish

2: French

3: Japanese


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Priority of the Paper SizeSet the priority of the paper size selected when auto-function

operates. (When APS released)

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P16.

Modify data

0: 11x17 4: 5.5x8.5

1: 8.5x14 5: SPECIAL2: 8.5x11

3: 8.5x11R


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Jumping Selection of the Paper SizeSet the most preferred paper size temporarily.

(Select by using P+cassette size button)

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P17

Modify data

0: 11x17 4: 5.5x8.5

1: 8.5x14 5: SPECIAL

2: 8.5x11

3: 8.5x11R


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch


ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

FS-102/103 Overload Control SelectSet the operation for an overload when using the finisher.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P20.

Modifies data

FS-102

0: No control overload

5: Stops when paper quantity

exceeds specification or more

than 25 copies are stapled.

FS-103

0-9 (refer to *1)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

0~3

6~9OperationData

–

–

–

5

–

Paper size

B6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R

B5R, B5, A4R, A4

8.5x11R, 8.5x11

B4R, F4R, A3R

8.5x14R, 11x17R

Capacity (number of sheets)

500

2,000

1,500

Number of

sheets

2~9

1~20

21~30

31~40

41~50

A3, 11x17 excluded A3, 11x17

1 staple

place

100 sets

50 sets

30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

2 staple

places

100 sets

50 sets

30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

2 staple

places

50 sets

15 sets

30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

1 staple

place

100 sets

20 sets

30 sets

25 sets

20 sets



DIAGNOSTICS

7-21

Setting Intermittent Time for Running TestThis feature specifies the wait time for making intermittent

copies in the running test mode (36 mode).

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address according to

desired waiting time.

P22: 3rd digit (102)

P23: 2nd digit (101)

P24: 1st digit (100)

Input the waiting time.

(1 to 255 seconds)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

* The waiting time is from 1 to 255 seconds.

If more than 255 seconds is input, the machine will default

to 255 seconds.

ADF Frame Erase SelectionThis feature enables/disables frame erase for the ADF.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P26.


0: No5: Yes


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

PM Cycle SettingThis feature selects the number of copies at which to display the

call for PM message.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select addresses:P27: 5th digit (105)

P28: 4th digit (104)

P29: 3rd digit (103)

Input the PM cycle.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttonss,

main switch


ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Finisher Initial Mode SettingThis feature specifies the operating mode the finisher should

enter in its initial state.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P46.


0: Non-sorter priority

1: Sort is priority

2: Group priority


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Clearing Fusing FailuresThis feature resets fusing failures [F34], [F35], and [F36].

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P47.

Input 0.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttonsStart printbutton

Auto Reset SettingThis feature specifies whether or not an auto reset is to take

place.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P48.


0: No auto reset

1: Auto reset (1 minute)

2: Auto reset (2 minutes)


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button



7-22

Key Counter Operation SelectionThis feature selects how the copier will operate when the

hardware key counter (optional) is removed during a copy

cycle.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P57.


0: Stops after completing the

current copy

5: Stop immediately.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Switching the Contents of Normal/HighSets the combination of bit numbers when the image quality

button is OFF, or turned to High mode.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P60.


normal/high

0: 1ED/2ED*

1: 1ED/4ED

2: 2ED/4ED


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

*ED = error diffusion

ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure SettingSets the edge erasure amount for copies run through the ADF.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P61.


0: 2mm

1: 3mm

2: 4mm

3: 5mm


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switchMagnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Toner Level Detecting SelectionSets display timing of toner replenishment.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P71.


0: After copying 100 sheets.

1~3: After copying 1000 to 3000

sheets.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Master Key Code SettingSets the master key code for entering into the ECM and data

control system operator modes.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select addresses P72 to P79.


Input the master key code into P72

(upper digits) to P79 (lower digits).Press the start print button.

Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button



DIAGNOSTICS

7-23

Original Image Shift SettingThis feature enables/disables image shifting.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P31.


* See table below.


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch


ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/Tranversal Line PaperSet separation conditions depending upon the kind of smal

size paper.

Operation

Enter the 25 mode.

Select address P88.


0: All transversal line.

1: Transversal line only 8.5x11,


Step

1

2

3

4

Entry

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Magnification/

reduction but-

ton, or the P and

copy quantity

buttons.

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

5.5x8.5, and bypass.*

1-2 mode

Original has a margin


Original has no margin






1-1 mode

Shifts paper to the right.

2-1 mode

Shifts even pages to the right.








1-2 mode

Shifts a backside to the left.


Shifts a front side to the right.

Deletes a right margin on a

backside.


Deletes a right margin on a

backside.







2-2 mode


Deletes a right margin on a backside.



Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Both 1-1 and 2-2 modes treat all originals as no margin.

Margins on copying paper are set as follows based on the

above specifications.

Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Shift on a

reverse side

Deleates a

right margin

on copying

paper

S h i f t s

c o p y i n g

paper to the

left

2-1 mode











7-24

Address Item Setting range Initial value Change details Remarks

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited


4 in 1 page placement

Selecting data control system

Selecting ECM


FS-103 subtray is selected. (printer)

Selecting auto tray switching (ATS)

FS-103 original quatity over is controlled

Selecting temperature in pre-heat mode

Selecting message language

Priority of the paper size

Jumping selection of the paper size (se-

lect by using P+cassette seize button)

Selecting the shut-off time in the pre-

heat mode.

FS-102/103 paper overload control

Selecting AMS

102

101 Waiting timer in the intermittent mode

100

Selecting a function to control data

(protection setting 1)

Selecting ADF frame erase

105

104 Setting PM cycle

103

-

-

0~5

0~5

-

0,2,3

0~2

0-9

0~2

0~3

0~9

0~9

0~9

0-9

0~1

0~9

0~2

0, 5

0~9

-

-

0

0

-

0

0

-

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

5

1

2

0

Set to 1 for 4 in 1 alignment (v24 EPROMs)

Impossible to set other than 0

0:N ot selected 1:Selected (no stop in limiting)

3: Selected (stop in limiting)

5: Selected (forced stop in limiting)

0: Not use 2: Sub-tray (reverse) 3: Sub-tray (normal)

0: ATS not selected

1: ATS for all trays

2: ATS for all trays except universal tray 1

*See bottom of table.

0: 160⋅C 1: 170⋅C 2: 180⋅C

0: American 1: British

2: French 3: Japanese

0: 11x17 1: 8.5x14 2: 8.5x11

3: 8.5x11R 4: 5.5x8.5 5: SPECIAL

0 through 3: 1 hour

4 through 6: 2 hours

7 through 9: 3 hours

*D

0: Selected 1: Not selected

1 second to 255 seconds

0: Protection

1: Canceling copy control protection

2: Canceling service control protection

0: No 5: Yes ( 5mm frame)

(After this period of time inreduced heat mode, themachine will shut off)

(To enable job memory #9 asboot, set address 22 to 1.

[version 24 EPROMs])

*1: Stops (at max. 45 sheets); 2: Stops (at max. 40 sheets); 3: Stops (at max. 35 sheets); 4: Stops (at max. 50 sheets); 5:

Stop after current copy (at max. of 50 sheets); 6: Stop after current copy (at max. 45 sheets); 7: stop fter current copy (at

max. 40 sheets); 8: Stop after current copy (at max. 35 sheets); 9: Stop after current copy (at max. 50 sheets).

Revised 3/98

25 Mode Address Map



DIAGNOSTICS

7-25

Address Item Setting range Initialvalue Change details Remarks

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

6061

62

63~65

Setting original image shift

105

104

103 PM counter

102

101

100

105

104

103 Drum counter

102

101

100

Selecting input of an intersheet original

copy number

Switching finisher priority

Canceling fusing abnormality

Automatic resetting

Fusing control during auto shut-off

Selecting 11x17 count number


Data control function select

(protect setting 2)




Selecting auto button for items in No. 58

Selecting the key-count-immediately-in-

terrupting mode

Switching auto/manual priority

Reading mode default

Selecting the contents of normal/highSelecting the lead edge erasure amount

in the ADF mode

Auto shut-off and automatic pre-heating

0~7

0~9

0~9

0~1

0~2

0~9

0~2

0~2

0~1

-

0~8

-

-

-

0~3

0,1,5,6

0~7

0-2

0~20~3

0~6

7

1

1

9

9

9

9

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

3

0

0

0

0

02

2

*C

0: Manual 1: Automatic counting

0: Non sort 1: Sort2: Group

0: Cancellation 1 ~ 9: Abnormal

0: No 1: 1 minute

2: 2 minutes

0: No 1: Yes

0: 1 count 1: 2 counts

0: No function 9: For global reset

8: Canceling protection

Set to “0” for 600 dpi

A*

0: Copier and printer stop after last copy exits

1: Printer - Ignores key counter status

5: Copier and printer stop immediately

6: Printer - Ignores key counter status

Copier - stops immediately

B*

0: Normal 1: Fine 2: S-fine

0: 1ED/2ED 1: 1ED/4ED 2: 2ED/4ED0: 2mm 1: 3mm

2: 4mm 3: 5mm

Shut off

0: No 1: 2 minutes

2: 6 minutes 3: 10 minutes

Pre-heating

0: No 4: 2 minutes

5: 6 minutes 6: 10 minutes

Revised 3/99



Revised 3/98

*A

*Selectable by 25 mode, P58.

*B

*APS is selectable only for USA machine.

*C

Paper sizeB6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R

B5R, B5, A4R, A4

8.5x11R, 8.5x11

B4R, F4R, A3R

8.5x14R, 11x17R

Capacity (number of sheets)500

2,000

1,500

*D

*1

Offset mode

Staple mode

*E

4

Performing lower limit detection by

PS3 (tray lower limit)Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper

limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper

(more than 1 sec)

Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)

abnormal ON by exiting paper.

Stop at predetermined number of

copies. (*2)

0~3

6~9OperationData

–

–

–

5

–

Number of

sheets

2~9

1~2021~30

31~40

41~50

A3, 11x17 excluded A3, 11x17

1 staple

place

100 sets

50 sets30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

2 staple

places

100 sets

50 sets30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

2 staple

places

50 sets

15 sets30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

1 staple

place

100 sets

20 sets30 sets

25 sets

20 sets

DataBoot as

Copier/Printer

FS-103 - Unload

Paper Tray (P74)

600 dpi Fuser - Wait

or ready Immediately

0

1

2

3

45

6

7

Copier

Printer

Copier

Printer

CopierPrinter

Copier

Printer

Detection

Detection

No detection

No detection

DetectionDetection

No detection

No detection

Wait

Wait

Wait

Wait

Ready immediatelyReady immediately

Ready immediately

Ready immediately

ADF original setting indication

ADF select

ADF select

Full auto

*Manual select

Automatic button function

Full auto

*Manual select

Full auto

*Manual select

ADF select

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

ADF

Platen

APS select

APS

APS

*Manual

*Manual

APS

APS

*Manual

*Manual

AES select

AES

AES

AES

AES

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

1-2 mode







Original has no marginOriginal has no margin

Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

67

Shift on a

reverse side

Deleates a

right margin

on copying

paper

S h i f t s

c o p y i n g

paper to theleft

2-1 mode







Original has a marginOriginal has no margin



DIAGNOSTICS

7-27

Address Item Setting range Initialvalue Change details Remarks

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

7677

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

Preliminary for paper size setting

Setting paper size for tray 2

Setting paper size for tray 3 (1000 LCT)

Setting paper size for tray 4 (1500 LCT)

Selecting outside erase the original

(uses APS sensors)

Selecting sensing toner remaining

amount

107 Upper range

106

105

104 Master key code

103

102

101

100 Lower range

No toner counter (upper range)



No toner counter (lower range)


Switching longitudinlline/tranversal line

IP-201 connection

Selecting polygon motor rotation during idle

Timing polygon motor low speed rotation

Selecting auto outside erase for original

0~9

0~1

0~3

0~9

-

0,1

0 -7

0~4

0~3

0,1

-

-

-

-

-

-

KBM:2

KBM:3

KBM:3

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

-

0

0

0

0

0

-

-

-

-

-

0: 11x17 1: 8.5x14 2: 8.5x11R

3: 8.5x11 4: 5.5x8.5 5: 8.5x5.5

6: - 7: 8.5x14 8: 8.5x11R

9: 8.5x11

0: Outside erase the original 1:Entire image only in the

platen mode 2:Transfer paper prior any time

0: Display of toner replenishing after 100 copies

1 ~ 3: Display of toner replenishing after 1000 copies through 3000 copies

0: All is transversal

!: 8.5x11/8.5x8.5/transversal only for manual feeding

0 = copier; 7 = printer; *E (see page 26)

0: No preliminary rotation 16535 rpm




4: Stop0: 15 seconds 1: 30 seconds

2: 60 seconds 3: 120 seconds

0: Rectangular

1: Corresponding an oblique original

XXX

XXX

Revised 3/98



7-28




7-29

DIAGNOSTICS

36 MODEThis operating mode enables technicians to make adjustments

while operating various parts of the machine.

Setting Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation



switch.

Input an address using the copy

quantity buttons.


Press the P button. (*1)

Input modified data using the copy

quantity buttons. (*1)

Positive/negative is switched by

using the stop/clear button.


Press the start print button. (*1)

Turn the main switch from OFF to

ON.

Remarks (status)

Selecting mode

36.

Setting the ad-

dress number

Conduct initial

processing.

Display data.

Modify data.

Inputting data.

Run a test copy.

Return to the

standard mode.

*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 7 if necessary.

Display and Input of Data

• For 1 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:

Positive data .......... xNegative data ........ –x

• For 2 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:

Positive data.......... xx

Negative data ........ – and xx flashesalternately.

• How to change data from a positive to a negativevalue.

While inputting data, when pressing the stop/clear

button, the sign is switched from positive to negative

and from negative to positive.

Note: The setting method of the running test mode differs

from the above procedure; therefore, follow the running

test mode procedure when entering that mode.

Running Test ModeThis mode will run the copier continuously to facilitate testing

procedures.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.

Input the running code (see *1)


(Initialization takes place)

After completing warming up,

press the start print button. (running

test mode starts.)

Stop the text by using the stop/

clear button.

Operation point

Page quantitybuttons.

Start print button

Start print button

The stop/clear

button.

*1 : Running code list

Code

0001

02

03

04

10

11

12

13

14

Mode

x100No paper

x100+no paper

Intermittent copy

Intermittent copy+no paper

x100

No paper

x100+no-paper

Intermittent copy

Intermittent copy+no paper

Total counting

Not counting

Counting



7-30

Adjusting Lead Edge TimingThe lead edge timing adjustment adjusts the distance from the

front edge of the copy to the starting point where the image

begins. This adjustment occurs in two ways:

• Copy type adjustment

When one sheet is copied, and then multiple sheets

are copied, the lead edge timing of the first original is

memorized.The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the

ON timing of the paper feed restart sensor (PS4) .

• Electronic RDH (E-RDH) type adjustment

When multiple sheets are copied, the RDH memorizes

the read data of the first sheet. This data is then used

to process the remaining sheets being copied.

With this adjustment, the lead edge timing is memorized

using the electronic RDH.

The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the

ON timing of the paper feed temporary stop sensor

(PS14)

Note:

• There is also a lead edge timing adjustment (printer

system)” in Mode 35 - 80, P3. However, it is not used

because it is an outputting timing when this machine is

used as a printer.

• Lead edge timing function in each tray and adjustment

function in modification are not equipped with.

Paper Feeding Loop AdjustmentAdjusts the paper feed loop for each tray.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.

Designate address 94.

Press the start print button to start

the initial processing.

Place an original on the platen

glass.

Select a paper feed tray.

Press the copy button.

Visually confirm the outputted

copy.

Press the P button.

The existing value flashes on the

copy quantity display.

Variable range of set value - 20 to 00 to 50 (99)

Standard value (targeted)

00

Variable amount by one step

1ms

Press the P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch


Start print button

Paper size button

Copy button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

* The allowable range of paper feed loop is - 20 to 99 (99 is for

bypass only).



7-31

DIAGNOSTICS

Lead-to-Trail Magnification AdjustmentAdjusts the lead-to-trail magnification.

Standard value: Within 0.5% for the same magnificationWithin 1 mm in 200 mm interval

200

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.





glass.


Check for any deviation in size

between the original and the copy.

Press the P button.



Variable range of set value

- 20 to 00 to 20Standard value (targeted)

00


0.1 %

Press the P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.




Place an 11x17 original on the

platen glass

Select a copy quantity of one.


Visually confirm the lead edge

timing of the copy.

Press the P button.



Variable range of set value - 99 to 00 to 99


00


0.1 mm

Press the P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttonsStart print button

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Lead Edge Timing Adjustment



7-32

Original Lead Edge Erasure AdjustmentAdjusts the lead edge deletion area.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.





glass.


Visually confirm the amount of

deletion at the lead edge of the

copy.

Press the P button.



Variable range of set value 00 to 99


1 pixel (63.5 µm)

Press a P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch


Start print button

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Erasing amount

Standard value: Front edge erasing amount iswithin 3 mm

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.




Place an 11x17 original on the

platen glass.

Select a copy quantity of two.


Visually confirm the lead edge

timing of the second copy.

Press the P button.



Variable range of set value - 99 to 00 to 99


00


0.1 mm

Press a P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Standard value: -3 mm~+3 mm

–3 mm

+3 mm

Paper

Image

Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing Adjustment



7-33

DIAGNOSTICS

Optical Brake AdjustmentAdjusts the brake starting time of the exposure unit.

Centering AdjustmentThe centering adjustment adjusts the distance from the side o

the copy to the image area. When adjusting, follow the steps

below.

(1) Align each tray to the writing position on the drum using

the laser beam as a reference.

(Adjustment of one-side of writing unit.)

Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided between the drum and the tray in copying the surface.

(2) Align the ADU using a surface copy original as a

reference. (Adjustment of ADU one-sided)

Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided be

tween a front surface and a rear surface.

(3) Adjust the writing timing to the drum using writing data

based on a reference established by the exposure unit

(Adjustment of one-sided of original image.)

Due to this, alignment of the reading portion and the

writing portion is completed. In addition, a series of one

sided adjustment is completed.

Relationship Between the Copy Process and the One-

Sided Adjustment.

(3)

(1)

(2)

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.





glass.



copy.

Press the P button.




0 to 9Standard value (targeted)

5


2 msec

Press the P button.Reading

↓

Writing

↓

Surface copyTray 1Tray 2Tray 3Tray 4

↓

Rear surface copyADU

5.5x8.5R only



7-34

Writing Unit Adjustment for One-sided

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Operation (display)

Set to mode 35.

(*1)




Select “11x17, from one side to

one side” mode.

Select an adjustment tray.

While pressing the P button, select

code 1.




- 32 to 32

Variable amount by one step 62.5mm

Press the P button.

Press the start print button to out-

put the test pattern.

Fold the test pattern longitudinally

and confirm whether or not the left

line and the right line exactly match.

If the lines do not match, perform

the one-sided adjustment for each

tray. (*2)

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Copy mode but-

ton

Paper size button

P button + the

copy quantity

buttons

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Start print button

*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for each tray,

see the other adjustment.

ADU Adjustment for Rear Side

Needed for duplexing 5.5x8.5R only.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation (display)

Set to mode 35.

(*1)




Press theimage quality button and

select the HIGH mode.

Select 5.5"x8.5", from one-sided

to 2-sided mode.

Select tray #1.


code 2.

The existing value flashed on the

copy quantity display.Variable range of set value

- 94 to 94


62.5mm

Press the P button.

Press the start print button to

output the test pattern.

Confirm that the central lines of the

front surface and the rear surface

of the test pattern exactly match.

If the lines do not match, perform

the one-sided adjustment for eachtray. (*2)

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

SET/F1 button

Copy mode but-

ton

Paper size button

P button + the

copy quantity

buttons

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Start print button

*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.

*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for the ADU,

see the other adjustment section.



7-35

DIAGNOSTICS

Adjustment on Original Image for One-sided

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation (display)

Set to mode 36.





glass.



copy.

Press the P button

The existing value flashed on the



- 32 to 00 to 32

Standard value (targeted) 00


1 pixel (63.5 µm)

Press the P button.

Operation point

Copy quantity

buttons, main

switch

Copy quantity

buttons

Start print button

Start print button

P button

Copy quantity

buttons

P button

Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,Address 80The adjustments in the table below can be performed by using

address 80 of the 36 mode without exiting the 36 mode to

access other adjustments.

CODE DESCRIPTION RANGE

P-1 Magnification length -20 to +20

(lead to trail) One step = 0.1%

P-4 Optics brake timing -00 to -09

One step = 2msec.

P-5 Registration 2 -99 to +99

(memory) One step = 0.1mm

P-6 Registration timing 1 -99 to +99(first copy) One step = 0.1mm

P-7 Image missing 00 to +99(lead edge deletion) One step = 1 pixel

(63.5µm)

P-8 Loop timing -20 to +50(tray) One step = 0.1%

P-0 DF-306 registration -99 to +99(select 1:1 & 2:1) One step = 0.47mm



7-36

Mode 36 List

Classifi-

cationCode

00

01

02

03

04

10

11

12

13

14

91

92

93

94

96

97

98

Mode

x100 mode

No-paper mode

x100 +

no-paper modeIntermittent copy

mode

Intermittent copy +

no-paper mode

x100 mode

No-paper mode

x100 +

no-paper mode

Intermittent copy

mode

Intermittent copy +

no-paper mode

Lead edge timingadjustment mode

(copy type)

Original lead edge

erasing adjustment

Vertical magnification

adjustment

Optical paper feed

loop adjustment

Optical brake

adjustment mode

One-sided adjust-

ment mode

Lead edge timing

adjustment mode

(E-RDH type)

Contents

Copies the selected quantity x100.

Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper.

Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper for

100 cycles.Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to

repeat cycle.

Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to

repeat cycle. Jam detection sensors are disabled to allow testing without paper.

Same operation as above, but the counter is enabled when selecting these codes.

Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted whilecopying.

- 99 ← 00 → 99

(slow) (standard) (fast)

Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm

Mode wherein the amount of lead edge deletion is adjusted while copying

from the lead edge of the original, deletion for set pixel number.

00 → 99

Change the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 µm

Mode wherein the vertical magnification is adjusted while copying.

- 20 ← 00 → 20

(short) (standard) (long)

Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 %Mode wherein amount of paper feed loop is adjusted while copying.

- 20 ← 00 → 50

(small) (standard) (large)

Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 msec

Mode wherein the starting time for optical braking is adjusted while copying.

0 ← 5 → 9


Changing the amount of data 1 = 2 msec

Mode wherein one-sided of the surface is adjusted while copying

- 32 ← 00 → 32


Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 µm

Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted while

outputting from the E-RDH.

- 99 ← 00 → 99

(slow) (standard) (fast)

Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm

F o r p r o

c e s s

F o r d e v e l o p m e n t

A d j u s t m e n t s

Revised 3/98



7-37

DIAGNOSTICS

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation


setting buttons 3 and 5, turn the

main switch ON.

Input an address location using

the copy quantity setting buttons.



a code number (*1)


Input the new data using the copy

quantity setting buttons. (*1)

Switch positive/negative using the

stop/clear button.


Press the start print button. (*1)

Turn the main switch from OFF to

ON.

Remarks (status)

Select mode 35

Selecting an

address

Conduct initial

processing

P button + the

copy quantity

buttons

Display data

Modify data

Data modifica-

tion is

completed

Conduct test

copy

Return to the

normal mode

*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 8 if necessary.

Lead Edge Timing AdjustmentThis procedure is for adjusting the lead edge timing when the

copier is selected as a PRINTER while in the super-fine mode

Note:Do not use this adjustment when the copier is selected as

a COPIER – refer to the lead edge timing adjustment performed

in the 36 mode in that situation.

35 MODEIn this machine, mode 35 is used as a check via internally

generated test charts to verify copy quality concerning the

image processing and writing units. The resulting patterns on

these charts are used to diagnose for the type of adjustments

that must be perfomed.

Note: Do not attempt to use modes that are not described in

particular.

Setting Method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation

Set to mode 35.


Press the start print button

to start the initial

processing.

Select “11x17 from 1 -sided

to 1-sided mode.

Press the start print button

to output the test pattern.

Check the lead edge timing

of the test pattern.Standard: ± 3.0mm

If the test pattern is not

within standards, press the

P and 3 buttons.

The existing value will

flash on the display. Select

a new value (-99 → 00 →99). Each step = 0.1mm.

Press the P button.

Repeat steps 6 through 9

until the lead edge timing

is within the standards.

Entry

Copy quantity button, main

switch

Copy quantity button

Start print button

Paper size and copy mode

buttons

Start print button

P and 3 buttons

Copy quantity button

P button

Revised 3/99



7-38

Mode 35 List





7-40

35-02 Gray Scale Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

If the test pattern has background or the density is light, determine which is abnormal, the processing system

or the gamma correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being normal, either theimage processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.

Note: each block is written by both lasers.



7-41

DIAGNOSTICS


Test pattern

[Check item]

If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the two lasers are functioning normally using 35-80 (P+6/

P+7).Note: Each column is written by a separate laser.



7-42


Test pattern

[Check item]

If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is output from the two lasers.

(Adjust in 35-80 mode, P+6/P+7)Note: 1. Basically, composition needs to be even.

2. Each column is written by alternating lasers.

3. Blocks should be visible above upper line.

Note: This 35-05 and 35-80 have different chracteristics in low density areas.

Use 35-80 for adjustment.



7-43

DIAGNOSTICS

35-11 Beam Misalignment Check

Test pattern

[Check item]

If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.

(Same as 35-80 mode, P+5)Note: Every line is written by a different laser.



7-44

35-16 Linearity Evaluation Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

Judge from this test pattern which of the systems is abnormal: the scanner system or the printer system.

Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edgetiming of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test

pattern, the scanner system is defective.

31mm237mm

2 0 m m

1 9 0 m m

1 9 0 m m

2 8 0 m

m

2 8 0 m m

Edge of paper

Edge of paper



7-45

DIAGNOSTICS

35-60 Process Overall Halftone

Test pattern

[Check item]

This test pattern is intended to judge which of the systems is the cause of an abnormality such as white

stripes, black stripes, and shifting of density: the scanner system or the write system isBy using this test pattern, a copy process takes place with the lasers and the charging voltage OFF, and

halftones are output. If the test pattern appears abnormal, the processing system is abnormal.

Note: No charging and no laser beam are used in development.



7-46

35-30 Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the abnormal section is located before the image process-

ing board. If the test pattern is an 8-bit output and is normal, the fault lies in the CCD board before the imageprocessing board.

Note: If there a problem with the copy and this output is good then the problem is in the CCD.



7-47

DIAGNOSTICS

35-32 Copy γ γ γ γ γ GA Built-in Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the electronic RDH board is abnormal.

There are two test patterns which correspond to the 8-bit mode in which the electronic RDH is not used, andthe mode in which it is used, respectively. The test pattern checks the state of the electronic RDH board. If

an abnormality is found when an electronic RDH is used and several copies of the test pattern are output,

there is an abnormality in the electronic RDH. In this case, an abnormality in the test pattern excludes any

difference in error dispersion.



7-48

35-36 Write GA Built-in Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the cause of an abnormality is located in or after the

image processing board. If the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in or after the image process-ing board (PWM function or after).



7-49

DIAGNOSTICS

35-37 Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern

Test pattern

[Check item]

This test pattern is intended to determine if the electronic RDH board or image processing board is abnormal

in the case where the copy image is abnormal despite the 35-36 mode pattern being normal.If the 35-36 mode pattern is normal but the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in either the

electronic RDH or the image processing board.



7-50

35-80

(P+1)Confirming on Writing Unit for Centering

Test pattern

[Check item]

Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process

section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-backmagnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the

centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the

position of each tray.



7-51

DIAGNOSTICS

35-80

(P+2)Confirmation on ADU for Centering

Test pattern

[Check item]

Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process

section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-backmagnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the

centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the

position of the ADU.



7-52

35-80

(P+3)Confirmation of Front Edge Timing (Printer)

Test pattern



7-53

DIAGNOSTICS

35-80

(P+4)

Test pattern

Confirmation of Printer Type Vertical Magnification(Main Drive Speed Adjustment)

Revised 3/98



7-54

35-80

(P+5)Confirming the Main Scanning/sub-scanning Alignment

Test pattern

[Check item]

If the test pattern appears to be abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.

(Same as 35-11 mode)



7-55

DIAGNOSTICS

35-80

(P+6)Adjustment of Gradation (LD1)

Test pattern

[Check item]

If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD1

writing should be between the two lines.(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)



7-56

35-80

(P+7)Adjustment of Gradation (LD2)

Test pattern

[Check item]

If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD2

writing should be between the two lines.(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)



7-57

DIAGNOSTICS

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

One-sided Adjustment

Tools used• Phillips screwdriver

• Pyramid chart (11x17)

Upper Tray One-sided Adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation

Partially pull the top tray out.

Loosen the 2 screws shown.

Move the side plate and adjust for one-sided.

After adjustment, tighten the 2 screws and then

make copies to check the results.

Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the one-sided

adjustment is within standards.

Securingscrew

Lower Tray One-sided Adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation

Partially pull the lower tray out.

Loosen the 4 screws shown.

Move the cover forward or backward to adjust for

one-sided.

After adjustment, tighten the 4 screws and then

make copies to check the results.



Securing screw



7-58

Bypass Tray One-sided Adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

Operation

Loosen the adjustment screw and lower the by-

pass tray.

Move the guide forward or backward.

After adjustment, make copies to check the results.



Adjustment screw

Bypass tray

Within 3 mm Center of image

Center of paper

Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm

LCT Tray One-sided Adjustment

Step

1

2

3

Operation

Pull the LCT tray out.

Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then

loosen the screw of each one-sided adjustment

plate (one plate on each side).

Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or

backward until the one-sided adjustment is within

standards.

Securingscrew

Front cover

Securing screw

Securing screw

One-sidedadjustment plate


Center of paper

Standard value: Mis-centering....... Within 3 mm



7-59

DIAGNOSTICS

ADU One-sided Adjustment

Front cover

One-sidedadjustmentplate

Step

1

2

3

Operation

Pull the ADU out.

Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then

loosen the 2 screws of each one-sided adjustment

plate (one plate on each side).

Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or

backward until the one-sided adjustment is within

standards.

Note: Move left and right plate in the opposite

directions.

Securing screw

Securing screw

Wire adjustment plate

Set screw

If the tray is tilted, paper skew may occur. Adjust the tray so tha

the tray and the paper feed roller shaft are parallel to each otherBe sure to perform this adjustment after replacing wires A and

B.

Tools required• Phillips head screwdriver

Adjustment method(1) Loosen the set screw of the wire adjustment plate on the

front of the tray.

(2) Perform the adjustment by moving the wire adjustmen

plate so that the top faces of both ends of the tray

coincide with the scribed scales, as shown in the figure

(3) Upon completion of the adjustment, tighten the wireadjustment plate securely with the set screw.

Tray Tilt Adjustment

Scribed scaled

Tray

Standard value: Mis-centering ...... Within 3 mm

in 35-16 mode(Image density : output with 255in43-13


Center of paper



7-60




MAINTENANCE

8-1

SERVICE SCHEDULE

Service Schedule

Service item (cycles)

Maintenance

(Every 120,000 copies)

Periodic check (I)


Periodic check (II)


Periodic check (III)


Periodic check (IV)


Periodic check (V)(Every 1,440,000 copies)

Periodic check (VI)

(Every 2,880,000 copies)

Maintance


Periodic check (I)


Maintenance


Periodic check (I)


Maintenance


Periodic check (I)

(Every 1,080,000copies)

Periodic check (II)

(Every 2,520,000copies)

Classifi-

cation

Main

body

RADF

(DF-306)

Finisher

(FS-102)

Finisher

(FS-103)

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 408 420 432 444 456 468 480 492

Number of copies (unit: 10,000 copies)



8-2

Number

of parts

replaced

2

1

1

1 each

1

Implementation classification

Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

ment

Material used

Tools used

Alcohol & cleaning pad

Cleaning pad

Blower brush

Blower brush

Blower brush & cleaning pad

* Clean toner control sen-sor with alcohol


Classification

Preparation

Fusing unit

Drum unit

No.

1

2

3

Service item

(1) Image check

(2) Kit contents check

(3) 47 - 94 (Check adjustment 51-

55

(1) Fusing unit removal

(2) Jam clearance door removal

(3) Upper cover removal

(1) Drum unit removal

(2) Drum unit check

(3) Charge unit removal

(4) Charge control plate removal

and cleaning

(5) Charge wire replacement

25SA25090

(6) Charge corona unit

(back plate, PCL, etc. )

(7) Charge cleaning block (B)

(upper)

(8) Charge cleaning block (A)

(lower) 25SA-2530

(9) Developing unit removal

(10) Cleaning blade removal

(11) Drum removal

(12) Drum cartridge/PTL/developing

unit bottom plate/toner controlsensor/separating claw

(13) Recycle pipe check

(14) Toner collecting screw (A)

(15) Guide roller removal/drum set

Guide roller installation

(Guide roller à

25SA-2080)

(16) Cleaning blade 25SA-2060

(17) Cleaning blade and upper plate

installation

SupplyCheck

Maintenance Items

Main body (Every 120,000 copies)

(18) Drum



MAINTENANCE

8-3


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used




Blower brush

Drum cleaner & cleaning pad

Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad

Cleaning pad & blower brush


Plas Guard No. 2



Blower brush

Plas Guard No. 2


(See Note 2).

Classification

Developing

unit

Transfer/

separation

corona unit

(See note 1)

Machine in-

side

2nd paper

feed unit

Drum unit

Drive unit & fil-

ter

ADU

Paper feed

unit (mainbody/LCT)

No.

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Service item

(1) Developing bias intercept

(2) Developer

(3) Developing unit

(4) Developing unit installation(1) Transfer/separation corona unit (front

and rear block/guide rail/separating

bridge/enter plate/back plate) removal

& installation

(2) Discharge wire

25SA26120

(3) Wire cleaning part (1) and (2)

1 25SA-2630 2 25SA-2620

(4) Transfer/exposure lamp (PSL)

(1) Upper part of conveyance unit

(2) Conveyance belt

(1) Paper dust removal brush

(removal)

(2) 2nd paper feed roller

(3) Paper dust removing brush (in-

stallation)

(1) Drum unit installation

(1) Back plate removal

(2) Developing suction filter check

(3) Ozone filters H/S

H 25BA73090 S 25BA73060

(4) Timing belt check

(5) Drive gear oiling

(6) Back plate installation

ADU intro. unit paper exit roller

(2) 4 position each of conveyance

and driven roller (ADU intro. unit)

(3) Timing belt (side external re-

moval/ADU intro. unit removal/

belt check)

(4) Sensors (intro. unit: 2 points/

ADU horizontal unit: 3 points/

intro. unit & side external instal-

lation)

(5) Gears oiling

(intro. unit & drive unit)

Upper paper feed unit

(1) Upper right side plate and unitremoval

(2) Main bottom plate and area

around paper feed unit

(3) Double feed prevention rollers

(2 each tray) 25SA40960

Number

of parts

replaced

1

3

1 each

1 each

Check

(1)

8

Revised 3/99

Note 1: A maintenance procedure to enhance the performance of the transfer/separation corona is provided in the CORONA UNIT

SECTION of this service manual.

2: The actual replacement cycle for double feed prevention rollers is 80,000 copies. Check the total counter for each tray and

replace the double feed prevention rollers as needed.



8-4


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Blower brush

Plas Guard No. 2






Blower brush


Blower brush

Plas Guard No. 2




Blower brush

Classification

Paper feed

unit (Main

body/LCT)

No.

11

Service item

(3) Sensor (5 positions of upper tray)

(4) Gears (upper tray) oiling

(5) Conveyance/driven roller

(upper tray)(6) Swing/feeding roller (3 positions

including bypass tray)

(7) Double feed prevention roller

(by-pass tray) removal, cleaning,

and Installation


(1st tray of main body)

(Cassette guide rail removal/

double feed prevention roller

cleaning)

(9) Cassette guide rail installation


(2nd tray of main body)

(Cassette guide rail removal/

double feed prevention roller

cleaning)

(11) Cassette guide rail installation

(12) Cleaning of LED board and cen-

tering error detection board

(13) Unit (cassette) and upper right

side plate installation

Lower paper feed unit

(14) Lower right plate and removal of

LCT unit

(15) Main bottom plate and area

around paper feed unit

(16) Sensor (4 positions of lower tray)

(17) Gears (upper)

(18) Conveyance and driven roller

(lower)

(19) Swing/feeding roller

(1 position)


(cleaning after opening open/

close cover)

(21) Unit (LCT) and lower right side

plate installation

LCT horizontal conveyance unit(22) Horizontal conveyance rail re-

moval

(23) Sensors

Number

of parts

replacedCheck



MAINTENANCE

8-5


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Plas Guard No. 2


Drum cleaner & cleaning padDrum cleaner & cleaning pad


Blower brush

Cleaning pad




Blower brush

Blower brush

Multi oil & cleaning pad


Roller cleaner & cleaning pad

Roller cleaner & cleaning pad




Blower brush & paper

Molytherm grease

Classification

Paper feed

unit (main

body/LCT)

Reading

section

Writing section

Fusing unit

No.

11

12

13

14

Service item

(24) Gears

(25) Conveyance roller (upper and

lower)

(26) Swing/feeding roller(27) Double feed prevention roller

(28) Horizontal conveyance roller

installation

(1) Platen glass (removal)

(2) Exposure lamp

(3) Reflection mirror

(4) Lens

(5) 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror

(6) White reference board cover

glass

(7) APS sensor

(8) Photo interrupter

(9) Supply cord check

(10) Wire tension

(11) Optics guide rail oilling

(12) Dust proof filter 25SA62100

(1) Dust proof glass (outside)

(1) Oil pad removal

(2) Impregnated roller removal

(3) Fusing cleaning roller removal

(4) Fusing roller (upper)

(5) Fusing roller (lower) (paper exit

guide plate removal)

(6) Fusing claw (upper) and (lower)

(7) Paper exit roller

(8) Fusing entrance guide plate

(9) Fusing temperature sensor (2)

(10) Fusing gear oiling

(11) Fusing cleaning roller

(installation) 25SA53200

(12) Impregnated roller

(installation) 25SA53210

(13) Oil pad (installation)

25SA-5350

(14) Paper exit guide plate installation

(15) Fusing upper cover installation

(16) Jam clearance door installation(17) Fusing unit installation

Check

Number

of parts

replaced

1

1

1

1



8-6


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad

Classification

Final check

No.

15

Service item

(1) Toner cartridge supply

(2) L detection (with new developer)

47 - 95

(3) Warm up time measure and check

(4) Image check after changing

consumables

(5) Copy sample check

(6) PM counter reset

47 - 90

(7) Drum counter reset

47 - 91

(8) Leakage breaker reset

(9) Machine surroundings, externals

Number

of parts

replacedCheck

RADF [DF-306] (Every 120,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Cleaning pad


Cleaning pad & blower brush

Plus guard No. 2

Classification

Paper feed

unit

Conveyance

unit

No.

1

2

Service item

(1) Double feed prevention sheet

(1) Conveyance belt

(2) Each sensor

(3) Neutralizing brush

(4) Drive gear

Check

Number

of parts

replaced

FNS [FS-102] (Every 120,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used






Blower brush


Classification

Conveyance

unit

Stapler unit

No.

1

2

Service item

(1) Conveyance roller

(2) Conveyance belt

(3) Conveyance stopper

(4) Conveyance guide

(5) Neutralizing brush

(1) Sensors

(2) Stapling section

(3) Staple cartridgePC/UA 947–381

Number

of parts

replaced

1

Check



MAINTENANCE

8-7


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Drum cleaner & clean pad

Plas guard No.2

Plas guard No.2

Plas guard No.2

Plas guard No.2

Drum cleaner & clean pad

Check

Number

of parts

replaced

2

1

4

2

Service item

(1) Paper passage check

(1) Conveyance roller

(2) Roller 12QR4525*(3) Swing roller 12QR5065*

(1) Paper exit roller/A 12QR4825*

(1) Main drive unit *1

(2) Tray up unit *1

(3) Shift drive unit *1

(4) Paper exit unit *1

(5) Staple unit

(1) Staple *2 12QRK001*

(1) Paper passage check

(2) Exter ior

Classification

Preparation

Conveyance

roller unit

Paper exit unit

Drive unit

Stapler unit

Final check

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Periodic Check (Main Body)

Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools usedClassification

Charge

corona unit

Fusing unit

Drum unit

Drive section

(Filter parts)

No.

1

2

3

4

Service item

(1) Charge cleaning block (B)

25SA-2540

(2) Charge control plate

25SA25080

(1) Fusing roller (upper)25SA53070

(2) Fusing claw (upper)

25SA53150

(3) Insulating sleeve

454053391

(1) Separating claw

25SA-2190

(1) Developing suction filter

540073070

Number

of parts

replaced

1

1

1

6

2

3

1

Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Paper feed

unit

No.

1

Service item


25SA40960

(2) Paper feed tire

540040562

Number

of parts

replaced

8

2

Check

Check

Actual replacement 80kSee bulletin #12

FNS (FS-103) (Every 120,000 copies)

*1: If noise occurs due to lack of oil, apply plas guard No.2.

*2: This work confirms if the staple is exchanged by CE.



8-8

Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cationSupply

Material used


Fusing unit

Optics unit

ADU

Paper feed

unit

Service item

(1) Ball bearing

454075040

(2) Fusing roller (lower)25SA53720

(3) Fusing claw (lower)

25BA53330

(4) Fusing roller shaft holder

25BA76030

(1) Exposure lamp

25SA83010

(1) Paper exit conveyance pulley

25SA76550

(1) Resist roller (lower)

25SA41050

(2) Resist roller (upper)

25SA41060

Number

of parts

replaced

2

1

3

2

1

2

1

1

CheckReplace-

ment

No.

1

2

3

4

Periodic check (IV) (Every 840,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Paper feed

unit

Fusing unit

No.

1

2

Service item

(1) Feeding tire (A)

25AA40010

(2) Paper feed tire

25BA40320

(1) Fusing lamp (L2)

25SE83030

(2) Fusing lamp (L3)25SE83050

Number

of parts

replaced

4

1

1

1

Check

Periodic check (V) (Every 1,440,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Drum unit

Transfer &

Separation

corona unit

Paper feedunit

Fusing unit

No.

1

2

3

4

Service item

(1) Solenoid press-in assembly

25SA-2170

(1) Transfer and separation corona

unit assembly

25SA-2600

(1) Main body paper feed interme-diate clutch parts

25SA82210

(1) Fusing entrance gear

25BA77261

Number

of parts

replaced

1

1

1

1

Check

Revised 3/99



MAINTENANCE

8-9


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used

Tools used

Cotton swabs and a 1:1

mixture of isopropyl

alcohol and acetone

Classification

Writing unit

Drum unit

Paper feed

unit

Charging

corona unit

Developing

unit

Fixing unit

ADU

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Service item

(1) Polygon mirror cleaning

Right side plate and writing unit

removing/Polygon mirrorsurface cleaning/Right side

plate and writing unit installing

(1) Toner control board unit

25SA-910*

(1) Paper feed clutch

25SA8201*

(2) Paper feed drive shaft assembly

25BA-7653*

(3) Paper feed idler gear/A

25BA7704*

(4) Paper feed regulation gear/upper

25SA7726*

(5) Paper feed drive motor25SA8003*

(1) Charging corona unit (PCL

included)

25SA-250*

(1) Developing unit

25SA-300*

(1) Temperature sensor 2

25SA8844*

(1) Conveyance pulley/C

25SA7659*

(2) Paper conveyance roller

25SA4310*

(3) ADU conveyance roller/D

25SA5016*

Number

of parts

replaced

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

Check

Revised 3/99

Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,880,000 copies)

Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) (Every 240,000 copies/200,000 copies)


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Paper feed

unit

No.

1

Service item

(1) Paper feed belt

1212ER4057*

(2) Paper supply rubber

12ER4034*

(3) Double feed prevention roller12ER4031*

Number

of parts

replaced

1

2

1

Check


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Stapler unit

No.

1

Service item

(1) Stapler unit

12FU22530

Number

of parts

replaced

1

Check

Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) (Every 480,000 copies)



8-10

SERVICE MATERIALS

FNS (FS-103)Regular service (I) (Every 1,080,000 copies)

*1: Guarantee period of the stapler unit is 200K staples.

* Actual replacement interval of the unit: (5K staples/1 cartridge) x 40 cartridges.


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Process unit

No.

1

Service item

(1) Stapler unit (1)12QR5210*

Number

of parts

replaced

2

Check


Clean-

ing

Lubri-

cation

Replace-

mentSupply

Material used


Drive unit

No.

1

Service item

(1) Paper feed motor (tray up/

down unit motor) *1

12FU22530

Number

of parts

replaced

1

Check

Regular service (II) (Every 2,520,000 copies)

*1: When the motor is removed, remove it holding the up-down tray to the paper exit.

Service materials that are considered to be standard (for all models), such as plastic bags or other containers cleaning pads,

setting powder, lubricants, and cleaners, are not listed. Refer to Konica's Tool Bulletin series for a complete listing of standardservice items available from Konica's Parts Distribution Center. The Tool Bulletin series also provides information for obtaining

materials that are not supplied by Konica.



MAINTENANCE

8-11

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

Tool No. Description Shape Remark

7050K0010

7050K0020

00M6-2-00

00M8-1-00

00M8-2-00

00VD-2002

00VD-5000

Temperature sensor PS

adjusting jig

Optics position

adjusting jig

Door switch jig

Thermostat PS

adjusting jig

(upper roller)

Thermostat PS

adjusting jig

(lower roller)

Potential adjusting chart

New pyramid chart

Quantity

1

2

1

1

1

1

1



8-12

Tool No. Description Shape Remark

00VC-2-00

Order from

DM15XL

Quantity

1

1

1

Drum cover

Blower brush

Meter

R & K Supply Company *

* R & K Supply Company 650 W. Smith Road, #17

Medina, Ohio 44256

Phone: 1-800-362-6780

Fax: 1-800-840-TOOL



INSTALLATION

9-1



9-2



INSTALLATION

9-3



9-4



INSTALLATION

9-5



9-6



INSTALLATION

9-7



9-8



INSTALLATION

9-9



9-10



INSTALLATION

9-11



9-12



10-1

INDEX

Revised 3/99

INDEXSymbols

1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-24

1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-25

25 mode

25 mode address map .............................................. 7-24ADF mode lead edge erasure ................................... 7-22

ADF frame erasure .................................................... 7-21

ATS ........................................................................... 7-18

Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF ........ 7-18

Automatic reset ......................................................... 7-21

Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating .......... 7-16

Cancellation of fusing abnormality ............................ 7-21

Copy control/service control mode enable ................ 7-15

Data control function ................................................. 7-15

Double count for 11x17 ............................................. 7-18

ECM .......................................................................... 7-15

Erasure outside of the original .................................. 7-17

Erasure of the outside of the original automatically .......................................................... 7-17

Finisher initial mode ................................................. 7-21

FS-102/103 overload control select .......................... 7-20

FS-103 original count over control ............................ 7-19

FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) ................................ 7-19

Fusing control during automatic shut-off ................... 7-16

Intermittent time for running test ............................... 7-21

Jumping selection of the paper size.......................... 7-20

Key counter operation ............................................... 7-22

Master key code ........................................................ 7-22

Message language .................................................... 7-20

Original image shift ................................................... 7-23

Paper size for trays 2, 3 and 4 .................................. 7-19

PM cycle ................................................................... 7-21

Polygon motor low speed rotation timing .................. 7-17

Preliminary rotation of polygon mirror ....................... 7-17

Priority of the paper size ........................................... 7-20

Setting method .......................................................... 7-15

Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16

Switching auto/manual priority .................................. 7-18

Switching the contents of normal/high ...................... 7-22

Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line

paper ....................................................................... 7-23

Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16

Toner level detection ................................................. 7-22

35 mode

List of mode 35 .........................................................7-38

Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ................................. 7-37

Setting method ..........................................................7-37

Test patterns of 35 mode ..........................................7-39

36 mode

Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80

7-35

Centering adjustment ...............................................7-33

Lead edge timing adjustment ...................................7-31

Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment .....................7-31

List of mode 36 ......................................................... 7-36

Optical brake amount adjustment............................. 7-33

Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32

Paper feeding loop adjustment ................................ 7-30

Running test mode ................................................... 7-29

Setting method.......................................................... 7-29

47 mode

Adjustment mode list (setting method) ........................ 7-5

Adjustment mode list (table) ..................................... 7-12

Charge corona current adjustment ............................. 7-3

Charge grid voltage adjustment ................................. 7-4

Developing bias adjustment ....................................... 7-4

Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5

Input check list ............................................................ 7-7

L detection adjustment ............................................... 7-6

Method of setting the 47 mode ................................... 7-1

Output check list .......................................................... 7-9

Separation (AC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3

Separation (DC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3Setting the 47 mode and multimode........................... 7-1

Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6

Test pattern density adjustment .................................. 7-5

Transfer current adjustment ........................................ 7-3

A-B

ADF frame erasing ........................................................... 7-21

ADF mode lead edge erasure setting .............................. 7-22

Adjustments

Adjustments when replacing parts .............................. 6-1

Centering adjustment ................................................ 7-33

Charge corona current ............................................... 7-3

Charge grid voltage .................................................... 7-4

Developing bias.......................................................... 7-4

Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5

L detection .................................................................. 7-6

Lead edge timing adjustment ................................... 7-31

When in printer mode (Mode 35 adjustment) .... 7-37

Lead-to-trail magnification ........................................7-31

One-sided ................................................................. 7-57

Optical brake ............................................................. 7-33

Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32

Paper feed loop ........................................................ 7-30

Separation (AC) current .............................................. 7-3Separation (DC) current ............................................. 7-3

Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6

Test pattern density .................................................... 7-5

Transfer current .......................................................... 7-3

Tray tilt ...................................................................... 7-59

Adjustment mode list (setting method) .............................. 7-5

Adjustment mode list (table) ............................................ 7-12

Address map of the 25 mode ........................................... 7-24

ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ............................ 2-22

ADU paper exit/conveyance section ............................. 2-111



10-2Revised 3/99

Composition ........................................................... 2-111

Disassembly and reassembly ................................ 2-112

M152 (ADU cooling fan) control ............................. 2-113

Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-111

Selector guide ........................................................ 2-112

ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit ........................... 2-23

ADU paper feed/conveyance section ............................ 2-114

ADU mis-centering control ..................................... 2-119

Composition ........................................................... 2-114

Conveyance control ................................................ 2-118


Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-114

Paper feed/reversal control .................................... 2-116

ADU timing chart ................................................................ 4-2

AES control ...................................................................... 2-46

Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80 ......... 7-35

APS control ...................................................................... 2-44

ATS selection ................................................................... 7-18

Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF .............. 7-18

Automatic reset setting ..................................................... 7-21

Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating setting ..... 7-16

C

CCD unit ........................................................................... 2-34

Cancellation of fusing abnormality ................................... 7-21

Center cross section ........................................................ 2-18

Centering adjustment ....................................................... 7-33

Charge control ................................................................. 2-66

Charge corona current adjustment .................................... 7-3

Charge grid voltage adjustment ........................................ 7-4

ClawsFusing (lower) ......................................................... 2-128

Fusing (upper) ......................................................... 2-129

Separation ................................................................. 2-57

Cleaning

Charge corona wires ................................................. 2-61

Polygon mirror ........................................................... 2-49

Transfer and separation ............................................ 2-62

Cleaning/toner recycling unit ............................................ 2-81

Composition .............................................................. 2-81

Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-81

Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-81

Cleaning blade ................................................................. 2-81

Connector layout diagram .................................................. 3-4

Cooling fan control ......................................................... 2-135

Composition

ADU paper exit /conveyance section ...................... 2-111

ADU paper feed/conveyance section ...................... 2-114

Cleaning/toner recycling unit ..................................... 2-81

Conveyance section ................................................ 2-120

Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61

Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69

Drive unit .................................................................. 2-29

Drum Unit ................................................................. 2-55

Externals .................................................................. 2-26

Fusing unit ............................................................. 2-123

LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section.................... 2-98

LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section.................. 2-102

LCT paper tray ....................................................... 2-106

Paper feed unit ........................................................ 2-84

Read section ............................................................ 2-33

Toner supply unit ..................................................... 2-78

Write unit .................................................................. 2-47

Connector disconnections list......................................... 5-16

Others ...................................................................... 5-18

Paper jams (J codes) ............................................... 5-16

Warning (E, F, P codes) ........................................... 5-16

Control

ADU mis-centering ..................................................2-119

AES ...........................................................................2-46

APS ...........................................................................2-44

Charge ..................................................................... 2-66

Conveyance .......................................................... 2-118

Cooling fan ............................................................ 2-135

Counter control ...................................................... 2-139

Developing bias ...................................................... 2-73

Dmax/drum jam control ........................................... 2-75

Exposure .................................................................. 2-43

FM14 (conveyance suction) .................................. 2-122

FM30 (developing suction) ...................................... 2-77

Fusing temperature ............................................... 2-133

Gray scale correction ............................................... 2-76

Image write .............................................................. 2-52LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control........ 2-101

LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control........ 2-104

LCT tray up/down control....................................... 2-110

M1 (main) ................................................................. 2-31

M3 (developing drive ) ............................................. 2-72

M4 (drum) ................................................................ 2-32

M5 (polygon) ............................................................ 2-51

M7 (charge wire cleaning) ....................................... 2-67

M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) ........................... 2-68

M12 (optics drive) .................................................... 2-39

M35 (agitator screw) ................................................ 2-73

M152 (ADU cooling fan) ........................................ 2-113Operation panel control ......................................... 2-137

Option control ........................................................ 2-140

Original read ............................................................ 2-44

No paper detection .................................................. 2-97

Paper feed ............................................................... 2-93

Paper feed/reversal ............................................... 2-116

Paper guide plate .................................................... 2-60

Paper size detection ................................................ 2-96

Paper up/down control ............................................ 2-95



10-3

INDEX

Revised 3/99

PCL/PSL ................................................................... 2-59

Separation claw ........................................................ 2-59

Toner density ............................................................ 2-74

Toner level detection ................................................ 2-80

Transfer/separation .................................................. 2-66

Control board circuit diagram .......................................... 3-23

Conveyance control ....................................................... 2-118

Conveyance belt ............................................................ 2-121

Conveyance section ...................................................... 2-120

Composition ........................................................... 2-120


FM14 (conveyance suction) control ....................... 2-122

Mechanism ............................................................. 2-120

Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ............................... 2-122

Copy control/service control mode enable ...................... 7-15

Corona unit ...................................................................... 2-61

Charge control .......................................................... 2-66

Composition ............................................................. 2-61

Disassembly and reassembly .................................. 2-62M7 (charge wire cleaning) control ............................ 2-67

M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) control................. 2-68

Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-61

Transfer/separation control ....................................... 2-66

Corona wires

Charge ............................................................. 2-61, 2-64

Transfer and separation ................................... 2-62, 2-65

Counter control ............................................................... 2-139

D

Data control function selection ......................................... 7-15DC driver board circuit diagram ....................................... 3-38

Developer ......................................................................... 2-70

Developing bias adjustment ............................................... 7-4

Developing bias control .................................................... 2-73

Developing drive unit ....................................................... 2-20

Developing suction filter ................................................... 2-27

Developing unit ................................................................ 2-69

Composition .............................................................. 2-69

Developing bias control ............................................. 2-73


Dmax control/drum jam control ................................. 2-75

FM 30 (developing suction) control ........................... 2-77Gray scale correction control .................................... 2-76

M3 (developing drive) control .................................... 2-72

M35 (agitator screw) control ..................................... 2-73

Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-69

Toner density control ................................................ 2-74

Diagrams, wiring ................................................................ 3-1

Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4

Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23

DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38

Drum board circuit ....................................................3-47

Electrical parts layout ................................................. 3-1

Operation board/1 circuit ..........................................3-35



Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7

Toner control sensor board circuit ............................ 3-45

Transfer paper detecting board circuit......................3-46

Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47

Disassembly and Reassembly

ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-112

ADU paper feed/conveyance section...................... 2-116

Cleaning/toner recycling unit..................................... 2-81

Conveyance section................................................ 2-121

Corona units .............................................................. 2-62

Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70

Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29

Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56

Externals ................................................................... 2-26LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-99

LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section ................... 2-103

LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-107

Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-86

Read section ............................................................. 2-33

Toner supply unit ...................................................... 2-79

Write unit ................................................................... 2-48

Dmax control .................................................................... 2-75

Double count for 11x17 .................................................... 7-18

Drive system diagrams ..................................................... 2-19

1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-24

1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-25ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ...................... 2-22

ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit .................... 2-23

Drum/developing drive unit ....................................... 2-20

Main drive ................................................................. 2-19

Paper feed drive unit ................................................. 2-21

Drum ................................................................................ 2-57

Drum board circuit diagram.............................................. 3-47

Drum/developing drive unit .............................................. 2-20

Drum unit .......................................................................... 2-55

Composition .............................................................. 2-55


Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-55

Paper guide plate control .......................................... 2-60

PCL/PSL control ....................................................... 2-59

Separation claw control ............................................. 2-59

Drive unit ......................................................................... 2-29

Composition .............................................................. 2-29

M1 (main) control ...................................................... 2-31

M4 (drum) control ..................................................... 2-32

Mechanisms .............................................................2-29

Dust prevention filter ........................................................ 2-27



10-4Revised 3/99

E

ECM setting ......................................................................7-15

Electrical parts layout ......................................................... 3-1

Electronic RDH ................................................................. 2-50

Erasure outside of the original selection .......................... 7-17

Erasure of the outside of the original automatically

selection ......................................................................... 7-17

Exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper............................ 2-22

Exposure control .............................................................. 2-43

Exposure lamp ................................................................. 2-35

Exposure unit ................................................................... 2-36

Externals ......................................................................... 2-26

Composition .............................................................. 2-26


F

Feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper ......................... 2-23

Finisher initial mode setting.............................................. 7-21

Filters

Developing suction .................................................... 2-27

Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27

Ozone (H) ................................................................. 2-27

Ozone (S) .................................................................. 2-26

FM14 (conveyance suction) control ............................... 2-122

FM30 (developing suction) control ................................... 2-77

Front edge of the original adjustment (erasing) ............... 7-32

FS-102/103 overload control select.................................7-20

FS-103/103A paper jam code cross-reference table ........ 5-7

FS-103 original count over control ..................................7-19

FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) .......................................7-19

Fusing application roller ...............................................2-126

Fusing claws (lower) ......................................................2-128

Fusing claws (upper) .....................................................2-129

Fusing cleaning roller ....................................................2-126

Fusing control during automatic shut-off selection ..........7-16

Fusing heater lamp (lower)............................................2-125

Fusing heater lamp (upper) ...........................................2-124

Fusing input gear .............................................................2-30

Fusing roller (lower) .......................................................2-127

Fusing roller (upper) ......................................................2-127

Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ............................. 2-129

Fusing unit ..................................................................... 2-123

Composition ...........................................................2-123

Disassembly and reassembly ................................2-124

Fusing temperature control..................................... 2-133

Mechanisms ...........................................................2-123

G-H

Gray scale correction control ...........................................2-76

I

Image formation ............................................................... 2-10

Charging ................................................................... 2-10

Cleaning .................................................................... 2-11

Developing ................................................................ 2-10

PCL ........................................................................... 2-11

Separation ................................................................. 2-11

Transfer ..................................................................... 2-10

Exposure ................................................................... 2-10

Image processing ............................................................... 2-3

A/D conversion ............................................................ 2-3

AES processing .......................................................... 2-4

Analog processing ...................................................... 2-3

Brightness/density conversion .................................... 2-4

Copy γ correction ........................................................ 2-6

Error diffussion processing ......................................... 2-6

Image compression processing .................................. 2-6

Magnification processing ............................................ 2-5Memory ....................................................................... 2-6

Outline ......................................................................... 2-3

Reversal processing .................................................. 2-6

SGU selector ............................................................... 2-6

Shading correction ...................................................... 2-3

Text/halftone identification .......................................... 2-4

Two-beam control ....................................................... 2-6

Write density control ................................................... 2-6

Image read mechanism ...................................................... 2-2

Outline ......................................................................... 2-2

Image write ......................................................................... 2-7

Beam combining prism ............................................... 2-8Collimator lens ............................................................ 2-8

Compression prism ..................................................... 2-8

Cylindrical lenses ........................................................ 2-9

fθ lens ......................................................................... 2-8

Fine adjustment prism................................................. 2-8

Index sensor ............................................................... 2-9

Outline ......................................................................... 2-7

Polygon mirror ............................................................. 2-8

Image write control ........................................................... 2-52

Initial setting ....................................................................... 7-5

Input check list ................................................................... 7-7

Installation .......................................................................... 9-1Accessories ................................................................. 9-2

Confirmation of operation.......................................... 9-12

Installation procedure.................................................. 9-3

L detection adjustment ................................................ 9-8

Paper size setting ....................................................... 9-9

Site requirements ........................................................ 9-1

Unpacking ..................................................................9-1

Intermittent time for running test.......................................7-21



10-5

INDEX

Revised 3/99

J

Jam list ............................................................................... 5-1

Paper jam (J codes) .................................................... 5-1

Trouble (E, F codes) ................................................. 5-10

Warning (P codes) ...................................................... 5-8

Jumping selection of the paper size ................................. 7-20

K

Key counter operation selection ...................................... 7-22

L

L detection adjustment ....................................................... 7-6

Lamps

Exposure ................................................................... 2-35

Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125

Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124PCL ........................................................................... 2-58

LCT 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance section................ 2-98

Composition .............................................................. 2-98


LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-101

Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-98

LCT 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance section.............. 2-102

Composition ............................................................ 2-102

Disassembly and reassembly ................................. 2-103

LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-104

Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-102

LCT paper tray ............................................................... 2-106Composition ............................................................ 2-106

Disassembly and reassembly ................................. 2-107

Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-106

Tray up/down control .............................................. 2-110

Lead edge timing adjustment .......................................... 7-31

When in printer mode (35 mode adjustment) ...........7-37

Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment ............................ 7-31

List of 35 mode ................................................................7-38

List of 36 mode ................................................................7-36

List of connector disconnections ..................................... 5-16

Others ....................................................................... 5-18

Paper jams (j codes) .................................................5-16Warning (E, F, P codes) ............................................ 5-16

M

M1 (main) control .............................................................2-31

M3 (developing drive) control .......................................... 2-72

M4 (drum) control .............................................................2-32

M5 (polygon) control ........................................................2-51

M7 (charge wire cleaning) control ...................................2-67

M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) control ................ 2-68

M12 (optics drive) control ................................................ 2-39

M35 (agitator screw) control ............................................2-73

M152 (ADU cooling fan) control ....................................2-113

Main body timing chart .......................................................4-1

Main drive ........................................................................ 2-19

Main motor unit ................................................................ 2-29

Maintenance ......................................................................8-1

Maintenance items ..................................................... 8-2

Periodic checks .......................................................... 8-7

Service materials ......................................................8-10

Service schedule ........................................................ 8-1

Special tools list ........................................................ 8-11

Master key code setting ................................................... 7-22

Mechanisms

ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-111


Cleaning/toner recycling unit..................................... 2-81

Conveyance section................................................ 2-120Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61

Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69

Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29

Drum unit .................................................................. 2-55

Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-123

LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-98


LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-106

Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-84

Read section ............................................................. 2-33


Write unit ................................................................... 2-47Message language selection ........................................... 7-20

Motors

Conveyance suction (FM14) ................................... 2-122

Main unit (M1) ........................................................... 2-29

N

No paper detection control .............................................. 2-97

NVRAM, Initializing the ...................................................... 7-2

O

Oil pad .........................................................................2-126

One-sided adjustment .....................................................7-57

Operation board/1 circuit diagram ...................................3-35



Operation panel control .................................................2-137

Operation section ............................................. See chapter 1

Optical brake adjustment .................................................7-33

Optics wire ....................................................................... 2-37



10-6Revised 3/99

Option control .................................................................2-140

Original image shift setting ............................................. 7-23

Original lead edge erasure adjustment ..........................7-32

Original read control ........................................................ 2-44

Outline and composition ................................................... 2-1

Output checklist .................................................................7-9

Overall wiring diagram .......................................................3-7

Ozone filter (H) .................................................................2-27

Ozone filter (S) .................................................................2-26

P-Q

P function, setting and checking with ................................. 6-3

Confirmation items by means of the P function........... 6-3

Density shift ................................................................ 6-4

Drum count and resetting............................................ 6-4

Functions to control data ............................................ 6-5

PM count and resetting ............................................... 6-3

Service Data Control Operation Mode Access ........... 6-4

Paper exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU ............................ 2-22

Paper feed control ...........................................................2-93

Paper feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU...........................2-23

Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1000 tray ............................ 2-24

Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1500 tray ............................ 2-25

Paper feed drive shaft ......................................................2-30

Paper feed drive unit ........................................................ 2-21

Paper feed loop adjustment ............................................ 7-30

Paper feed/reversal control ...........................................2-116

Paper feed unit ................................................................2-84

Composition ............................................................. 2-84

Disassembly and reassembly .................................2-86Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-84

No paper detection control ....................................... 2-97

Paper feed control ....................................................2-93

Paper size detection control .....................................2-96

Paper up/down control ............................................. 2-95

Paper guide plate control ................................................2-60

Paper size detection control ............................................2-96

Paper size setting for trays 2, 3 and 4 ............................. 7-19

Paper up/down control .....................................................2-95

Parts that operate when the main switch is OFF ..........2-134

Parts that operate when the main switch is ON............2-134

PCL ...........................................................................2-58PCL/PSL control ..............................................................2-59

Periodic checks ................................................................. 8-7

PM cycle setting ............................................................... 7-21

Polygon mirror .................................................................2-49

Polygon motor low speed rotation timing ........................7-17

Preliminary rotation of polygon motor selection .............. 7-17

Priority of the paper size ..................................................7-20

Product specifications ..................................................... 2-16

RRead section ................................................................... 2-33

AES control ...............................................................2-46

APS control ...............................................................2-44

Composition .............................................................2-33

Disassembly and reassembly .................................2-33

Exposure control .......................................................2-43

M12 (optics drive) control .......................................... 2-39

Mechanisms .............................................................2-33

Original read control ................................................. 2-44

Removal/replacement

1000 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107

1500 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107

ADU paper exit conveyance section ....................... 2-112


CCD unit ................................................................... 2-34

Charge corona unit ................................................... 2-62

Charge corona wire ................................................... 2-64

Cleaning blade .......................................................... 2-81Conveyance belt ..................................................... 2-121

Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ......................... 2-122

Conveyance unit ..................................................... 2-121

Developer .................................................................. 2-70

Developing suction filter ............................................ 2-27

Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70

Drum ......................................................................... 2-57

Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56

Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27

Electronic RDH ......................................................... 2-50

Exposure lamp .......................................................... 2-35

Exposure unit ............................................................ 2-36Fusing application roller .......................................... 2-126

Fusing cleaning roller .............................................. 2-126

Fusing claws (lower) ............................................... 2-128

Fusing claws (upper) ............................................... 2-129

Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125

Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124

Fusing rollers (upper and lower) ............................. 2-127

Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-124

Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ...................... 2-129

Fusing input gear ...................................................... 2-30

LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-99


Main motor unit ......................................................... 2-29

Oil pad ..................................................................... 2-126

Optics wire ................................................................ 2-37

Ozone filter (H) ..........................................................2-27

Ozone filter (S) ..........................................................2-26

Paper feed drive shaft ...............................................2-30

Paper feed unit ......................................................... 2-86

Paper feed unit (second) .......................................... 2-91

PCL ...........................................................................2-58



10-7

INDEX

Revised 3/99

Separation claws ...................................................... 2-57

Separation claw solenoid press-fit assembly .........2-58

Thermostat (lower) .................................................2-131

Thermostat (upper) ................................................2-130

Toner control board unit ...........................................2-71


Transfer and separation corona unit ........................2-62

Transfer and separation wires .................................2-65

Write unit ...................................................................2-48

Rollers, fusing (upper and lower) .................................2-127

Running test mode ..........................................................7-29

S

Selector guide (ADU paper exit conveyance section)... 2-112

Separation claw control .................................................... 2-59

Separation claws .............................................................. 2-57

Separation claw solenoid press-fit asssembly ................. 2-58

Separation (AC) current adjustment ................................... 7-3Separation (DC) current adjustment .................................. 7-3

Service materials .............................................................. 8-10

Service schedule ................................................................ 8-1

Setting the 25 mode ......................................................... 7-15

Setting the 35 mode ......................................................... 7-37

Setting the 36 mode ......................................................... 7-29

Setting the 47 mode and multimode .................................. 7-1

Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16

Space requirements ......................................................... 2-15

Special tools list ............................................................... 8-11

Specifications ................................................................... 2-16

Switching auto/manual priority ......................................... 7-18

Switching the contents of normal/high ............................. 7-22

Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line

paper .............................................................................. 7-23

System configuration ........................................................ 2-13

T-U-V

Telephone number setting ................................................. 7-6

Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16

Temperature sensors 1 and 2, fusing ............................ 2-129

Test pattern density adjustment ......................................... 7-5

Test patterns of 35 mode ................................................. 7-39

Adjustment of gradation (LD1) (35-80, P+6) ............. 7-55Adjustment of gradation (LD2) (35-80, P+7) ............. 7-56

ADU for centering (35-80, P+2) ................................ 7-51

Beam misalignment check (35-11)...........................7-43

Copy γ gate array built-in pattern (35-32) .................7-47

Electronic RDH GA built-in pattern (35-37) ..............7-49

Front edge timing (printer) (35-80, P+3) ...................7-52

Gray scale pattern (35-02) ........................................7-40



Horizontal magnification (main drive speed

adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) ....................................... 7-53

Linearity evaluation pattern (35-16) .........................7-44

Overall halftone (35-01)............................................ 7-39

Process overall halftone (35-60) ..............................7-45

Read gate array built-in pattern (35-30) ................... 7-46

Write gate array built-in pattern (35-36) ...................7-48

Writing unit for centering (35-80, P+1)......................7-50

Main scanning sub-scanning alignment(35-80, P+5) ............................................................ 7-54

Thermostat (lower) ......................................................... 2-131

Thermostat (upper) ........................................................ 2-130

Timing charts

ADU ............................................................................ 4-2

Main body ................................................................... 4-1

Toner control board unit ................................................... 2-71

Toner control sensor board circuit .................................... 3-45

Toner density control ........................................................ 2-74

Toner level detection control ............................................ 2-80

Toner level detection selection ........................................ 7-22

Toner supply unit .............................................................. 2-78Composition .............................................................. 2-78


Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-78

Toner level detection control ..................................... 2-80

Transfer current adjustment ............................................... 7-3

Transfer paper LED board circuit diagram ......................3-47

Transfer paper detecting board circuit diagram .............. 3-46

Transfer/separation control .............................................. 2-66

Transfer/separation corona maintenance ....................... 2-65

Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1000 ..........................2-24

Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1500 ..........................2-25

Tray tilt adjustment ........................................................... 7-59

Tray up/down control .....................................................2-110

W-X-Y-Z

Wiring diagrams ................................................................. 3-1

Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4

Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23

DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38

Drum board circuit ..................................................... 3-47

Electrical parts layout .................................................. 3-1

Operation board/1 circuit........................................... 3-35



Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7

Toner control sensor board circuit ............................3-45

Transfer paper detecting board circuit ......................3-46

Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47

Wiring diagram, overall ......................................................3-7

Write unit .......................................................................... 2-47

Composition .............................................................2-47



Disassembly and reassembly ..................................2-48

I i l 2 52

Documents

Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual